ER model

Openbravo ERP
Version 1.0

Visit us at www.openbravo.com

Preface
This document represents Openbravo’s Entity Relation Diagram (ERD), created with data obtained from the Application Dictionary. The aim of the document is not to get a formal ERD, but to get a complete view of the tables and columns behind the functionalities of Openbravo ERP.

The diagram has been separated into several chapters according to the main functional modules of the ERP. The same table might appear in different chapters but only once in detail. This is done to emphasize the relation among the main tables of the chapter with the rest of the diagram. All the relations are represented among the examples, but those not representative in the chapter have been deleted.

The not implemented columns are those ones that aren’t being used in the ERP. They can be part of deleted functionalities, hidden or not used functionalities or they are about to be developed.

The tables of Openbravo have some common characteristics. All tables must have a unique primary key with columnname like tablename+ ID. The table name has to follow the prefix policy: • A: asset management • AD: application dictionary • C: core functionality • I: import temporary tables and processes • M: material management • FACT: Accounting tables. • GL: general ledger • MA: manufacturing • MRP: material resource • S: service management • CUS, PD, US, ZZ: personal developments. Common columns of all tables: • Created: date of record creation. 2/461

• CreatedBy: id of the user that has created the record. • Updated: date of the last update of the record. • UpdatedBy: id of the user that has commit the last update. • IsActive: logic delete of the record. • AD Client ID: id of the client owner of the record. AD Client ID = 0 is System client for System Administrator use. • AD Org ID: id of the organization owner of the record. AD Org ID = = is Asterisk organization that shares the record to all the organizations of the client.

3/461

Contents
1 Window, Tab and Field 1.1 AD Window . . . . 1.2 AD Tab . . . . . . 1.3 AD Image . . . . . 1.4 AD AuxiliarInput . 1.5 AD FieldGroup . . 1.6 AD Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 15 17 19 19 20 20 23 23 25 28 29 29 30 31 32 32 32 34 35 35 37 37 40 40 42 44 45 47 47 47 50 50 51 51 51 53 53

2 Table and column and attachments 2.1 AD Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 AD Column . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 AD Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 AD Val Rule . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 AD Element . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 C File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 AD DataType . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Reference 3.1 AD Reference 3.2 AD Ref List . . 3.3 AD Ref Table . 3.4 AD Ref Search 3.5 AD Ref Search

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Column

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

4 Menu 4.1 AD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Process, Form and Task 5.1 AD Process . . . . . 5.2 AD Process Para . . 5.3 AD Form . . . . . . 5.4 AD Task . . . . . . . 6 Workflow 6.1 AD Workflow . . . 6.2 AD WF Node . . . 6.3 AD WF Node Trl . 6.4 AD WF NodeNext 7 Tree 7.1 AD 7.2 AD 7.3 AD 7.4 AD

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

TreeNodePR TreeNodeBP TreeNode . . TreeBar . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

4/461

7.5 AD Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 AD TreeNodeMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Internals: process execution, sequences, messages, log 8.1 AD PInstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 AD PInstance Para . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 AD PInstance Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 AD Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 AD Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 AD Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 AD TextInterfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 AD Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9 AD Month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54 54 55 55 57 57 58 59 60 60 61 62 63 63 65 66 66 68 68 69 70 71 71 72 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 76 77 78 78 81 82 83 83 83 84 84

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

9 Model objects mapping 9.1 AD Model Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 AD Model Object Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Translations 10.1 AD Language . . . . 10.2 AD Window Trl . . . 10.3 AD Process Trl . . . 10.4 AD Tab Trl . . . . . 10.5 AD Element Trl . . . 10.6 AD FieldGroup Trl . 10.7 AD Reference Trl . . 10.8 AD Process Para Trl 10.9 AD Menu Trl . . . . 10.10 AD Message Trl . . 10.11 AD Field Trl . . . . . 10.12 AD TextInterfaces Trl 10.13 AD Task Trl . . . . . 10.14 AD Workflow Trl . . 10.15 AD Form Trl . . . . . 10.16 AD Ref List Trl . . . 10.17 AD WF Node Trl . . 11 Access 11.1 AD 11.2 AD 11.3 AD 11.4 AD 11.5 AD 11.6 AD 11.7 AD 11.8 AD

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User . . . . . . . . User Roles . . . . Role . . . . . . . . Task Access . . . Window Access . Process Access . Workflow Access . Form Access . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

5/461

11.9 AD Role OrgAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10 AD Table Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Country, Region and Location 12.1 C Country . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 C Country Trl . . . . . . . . 12.3 C Region . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 C Location . . . . . . . . .

85 85 86 86 88 89 89 91 91 93 95 97 98 99 99 100 100 102 103 103 105 105 107 107 107 109 116 117 118 118 119 121 123 123

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

13 System, Client, Org and Session info. 13.1 AD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 AD Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 AD ClientInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4 AD Org . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 AD OrgInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 AD Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 AD Preference . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth 14.1 M Warehouse . . . . . . . . . 14.2 M Locator . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 M Warehouse Shipper . . . . 14.4 M Freight . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 M FreightCategory . . . . . . 14.6 M Shipper . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Business partner 15.1 C Greeting . . . . . 15.2 C Greeting Trl . . . 15.3 C BPartner . . . . . 15.4 C BPartner Location 15.5 C SalesRegion . . . 15.6 C BP Group . . . . 15.7 C BP TaxCategory . 15.8 C BP BankAccount 15.9 AD User . . . . . . . 15.10 InterestArea . . . R 15.11 ContactInterest . . R

Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

16 Payment term 125 16.1 C PaymentTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 16.2 C Paymenttermline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 16.3 C PaymentTerm Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6/461

17 Product 17.1 M Product . . . . . . 17.2 M Product Category 17.3 M Substitute . . . . 17.4 M Product BOM . . 17.5 M Product Customer 17.6 M Product Org . . . 17.7 M Product PO . . . 17.8 M Replenish . . . . 17.9 M Product Template 17.10 Product UOM . . M 17.11 Costing . . . . . . M 17.12 Product Trl . . . . M

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

131 131 136 137 138 138 139 140 142 143 143 144 145

18 Unit of Measure 146 18.1 C UOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 18.2 C UOM Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 18.3 C UOM Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 19 Attribute 19.1 M Attribute . . . . . . . 19.2 M AttributeSet . . . . . 19.3 M AttributeValue . . . . 19.4 M AttributeUse . . . . . 19.5 M AttributeSetInstance . 19.6 M AttributeInstance . . 20 Pricing 20.1 M PriceList . . . . . . . 20.2 M PriceList Version . . 20.3 M ProductPrice . . . . . 20.4 M DiscountSchema . . 20.5 M DiscountSchemaLine 20.6 M Offer . . . . . . . . . 20.7 M Offer PriceList . . . . 20.8 M Offer BPartner . . . . 20.9 M Offer BP Group . . . 20.10 Offer Prod Cat . . . . M 20.11 Offer Product . . . . M 20.12 Discount . . . . . . . C 20.13 BPartner Discount . . C 150 150 152 152 153 153 154 155 155 157 158 158 159 162 163 163 164 164 164 165 165 167 167 167 169

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 Tax 21.1 C TaxCategory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 C TaxCategory Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3 C Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/461

21.4 C Tax Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 21.5 C Tax Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 22 Currency 22.1 C Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2 C Currency Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3 C Conversion Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 173 175 175

23 Document type 177 23.1 C DocType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 23.2 C DocType Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 24 Activity, Campaign and Channel 24.1 C Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2 C Campaign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.3 C Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Order 25.1 C 25.2 C 25.3 C 25.4 C 25.5 C 182 182 184 185 186 186 188 193 196 196 198 198 200 200 201 203 203 208 209 211 212 213 214 215 216 218 219 220 222 223

Incoterms . . . . Order . . . . . . OrderLine . . . . OrderLine Offer OrderTax . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

26 Purchase specific 26.1 M Requisition . . . 26.2 M RequisitionLine 26.3 M MatchInv . . . . 26.4 M MatchPO . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

27 Transaction 27.1 M InOut . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 M InOutLine . . . . . . . . . . 27.3 M Movement . . . . . . . . . 27.4 M MovementLine . . . . . . . 27.5 M Inventory . . . . . . . . . . 27.6 M InventoryLine . . . . . . . 27.7 M Internal Consumption . . . 27.8 M Internal ConsumptionLine 27.9 M Production . . . . . . . . . 27.10 ProductionPlan . . . . . . M 27.11 ProductionLine . . . . . . . M 27.12 Transaction . . . . . . . . . M 27.13 Storage Detail . . . . . . . M 27.14 Storage Pending . . . . . M

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8/461

28 Invoice 28.1 C Invoice . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2 C Invoice Discount . . . . . . 28.3 C InvoiceLine . . . . . . . . . 28.4 C InvoiceLine Offer . . . . . 28.5 C InvoiceLine AcctDimension 28.6 C InvoiceTax . . . . . . . . . 29 Commission 29.1 C Commission . . . 29.2 C CommissionLine . 29.3 C CommissionRun . 29.4 C CommissionAmt . 29.5 C CommissionDetail 30 Rappel 30.1 M Rappel 30.2 M Rappel 30.3 M Rappel 30.4 M Rappel 30.5 M Rappel 30.6 M Rappel

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

224 224 229 229 231 232 232 234 234 236 237 238 239 241 241 243 243 244 244 245 246 246 246 248 249 253 255 255 257 258 259 260 261 261 263 263 264 267 267 270 272

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . Bpartner . . . . . Product . . . . . Productcategory Scale . . . . . . Invoice . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

31 Project 31.1 C ProjectType . . . . . . 31.2 C Phase . . . . . . . . . 31.3 C Task . . . . . . . . . . 31.4 C Project . . . . . . . . 31.5 C ProjectPhase . . . . . 31.6 C ProjectTask . . . . . . 31.7 C ProjectLine . . . . . . 31.8 C Project Vendor . . . . 31.9 C ProjectProposal . . . 31.10 ProjectProposalLine . C 31.11 ProjectProposalTask . C 32 Services 32.1 S ExpenseType . . . 32.2 S TimeType . . . . . 32.3 S TimeExpense . . 32.4 S TimeExpenseLine

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

33 Payment management 33.1 C Settlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2 C Debt Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3 C Glitem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9/461

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33. .8 C CashLine . . . . . . . . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C BP Group Acct . . . . . . . . . . . .4 C AcctSchema GL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Accounting Schema 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. 320 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C ElementValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C AcctSchema Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 C CashBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C AcctSchema . . . . .1 C Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . Debt Payment Bal Replace DP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C BP Customer Acct . . Remittance Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 AD AccountingRpt Element 37 Account Element 37. . . . . . . . . .5 C BankStatementLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 C Debt Payment Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . 35. . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . .3 C Period . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . .7 C 33. . . .2 C AcctSchema Element . . . . . . .4 C PeriodControl . . . . . .3 C ElementValue Operand 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. .5 C AcctSchema Default . . .1 C Element . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Accounting 317 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 C 33. 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 C 33. . . . . . . 35 Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 C BankStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remittance Type . . .6 C Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. 317 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C PromissoryFormat .5 C ValidCombination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C BP Vendor Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C Charge . . . . . . . . . . RemittanceLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 C NonBusinessDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 10/461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP ManagementLine . . . . .2 C BankAccount .4 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C 33. . . . . . . 273 273 274 275 276 276 277 278 280 280 282 283 285 286 288 289 290 291 292 292 292 294 295 295 297 297 299 301 301 302 308 310 310 312 314 314 315 34 Bank and Cash management 34. . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 C ElementValue Trl . . . . Year and Period 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C Year . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA WRPhaseProduct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 AcctSchema Default . . . . . . . . . .6 MA Sequence Machine . . 43 Manufacturing: Work Requirement 366 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38. 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Fact Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38. . . . .12 Charge Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C 38.38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 GL JournalLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. . . .1 MA WorkRequirement . . .1 MA ProcessPlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . 40 Assets 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C 39 General Ledger and Budget 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C 38. . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA Sequence Employee 42. . . . . . . . . . . .5 MA Sequence IC . . . . . . . . A 38. . . . . . . . . 40. . . . .1 GL Category . . . . 322 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 328 329 329 330 331 337 337 337 340 342 344 344 347 347 352 352 354 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 11/461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 A Asset Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 C BankAccount Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 M Product Acct . . . . . 366 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 38. . . . . . . . . . . .1 A Asset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 C Tax Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 GL JournalBatch . . . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C CashBook Acct . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 C BudgetLine .15 Warehouse Acct . . .11 Asset Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 GL Journal . . . . . .2 MA ProcessPlan Version 42. . . . 42. 41 Accounting Facts 355 41. . . .3 A Amortization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 A Amortizationline . 38. .4 C BP Employee Acct . . . . . . M 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 M Product Category Acct 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 C Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . .14 Glitem Acct . .10 Asset Group Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Project Acct . . . . . 368 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 MA SequenceProduct . . .2 MA WRPhase . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 359 361 361 363 363 364 364 . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 42 Manufacturing: Process Plan 42. . .3 MA Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39.

. . . . . .7 M Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Manufacturing: Periodic Control 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. . . . . . . . . . . . .10 MA GlobalUse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA Maint Operation . . . . . . . 12/461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA PL Machine . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 M ProductionPlan . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA Machine Cost . . . . . .44 Manufacturing: Work Effort 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Manufacturing: Machine 49. . .4 MA ToolsetUsed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Manufacturing: Toolset 45. . . .6 MA Maint Worker . . . 46. . 47 Manufacturing: Critical Control Points 47. 47. . . . . . . . . .1 MA PL Employee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46. . . . . . . . . .1 MA Maintenance . . . . . . .3 MA CCP Shift . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 MA Measure Time . .1 MA Machine . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA PC Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Periodic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . .4 MA PC Case .1 MA Toolset . . . 371 371 371 373 373 374 374 375 376 378 379 381 381 381 383 383 385 385 385 387 387 389 389 389 391 392 392 393 393 395 395 397 397 398 398 399 401 401 401 403 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. .5 MA Measure Shift . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. 48 Manufacturing: Maintenance 48. . . . . . . . . .2 MA PC Value . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . .1 MA CCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . 49. . . . . .3 MA PL InvoiceLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Toolset Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46. . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA ToolsetProcess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Machinestation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 MA Measure Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA Maint Periodicity . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA Machine Type . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Maint Part . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . .8 M ProductionLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MA Maint Scheduled . . . . . . . .5 MA WEEmployee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 MA WEIncidence . . . . . .4 MA Measure Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA CCP Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA PL IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . 48. .

. . . . . . . . . . . 416 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MA Costcenter Version . . . . . . . . . . .2 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 53 Manufacturing: Work Station 414 53. . . . 50. . . . . . . .8 C Salary Category 54. . . . 431 13/461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 51. . . . .50 Manufacturing: Cost Center 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlanningMethodLine Run Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA Indirect Cost Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 56. . . . . . .4 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . 405 405 405 407 407 408 51 Manufacturing: Indirect Cost 409 51. . Cost . . . . . . . . PlanningMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Costcenter IC . .5 MRP 55. . . . . . . . Run PurchaseLine . . . . . . . .6 MRP 55. . .2 MA CostCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 M WH Schedule Product . . . . . . SalesForecast . . . . . . . .6 C Salary Category 54. . . .3 MRP 55. . . . .4 MRP 55. SalesForecastLine . . .2 M WH Schedule . . . . . .1 MA Indirect Cost . 416 54 Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 52 Manufacturing: Incidence 412 52. . . . . . . .4 MA CostCenter Machine 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . .1 MA Process . . . . .5 C Salary Category 54. . . . . .1 M Locator Type . . Run ProductionLine Run Purchase . . . . .9 MRP 417 417 417 417 417 417 419 419 419 419 419 420 420 420 422 422 423 423 425 426 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost .10 Salary Category C 55 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . .3 MA Costcenter Employee 50. . Cost . . . . Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 53. . .1 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Warehouse services 429 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Incidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 MRP 55. .3 MA Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .1 C ExternalPOS 57. . . . . . . . 431 56. . . . . . . . . . 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 I ElementValue . . . . 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 M InOutLine Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 I BPartner . 432 56.6 I Order . . . 14/461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 AD ImpFormat Row 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 AD ImpFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Import data 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C ExternalPOS 57. . . . . . . . .5 M WH Period Invoiced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 I Product . . . . . .7 I Budgetline . . . . . . . .4 M WH Period . . . . . . . . . . 58. . . . . . . . . .4 M Product . . . . 434 434 436 437 437 442 442 444 445 447 451 453 458 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C ExternalPOS 57. . . . 432 57 External POS 57. . . . . . . . . . .

You cannot share data between Clients.1 Window. copy the entity and select User! • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. The Field Group allows you to define subsections in a tab. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The auxiliar inputs fix the values of a selected field. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. comment or help about the use of this item. Transaction or Query) • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction.1 AD Window The Window table defines each window in the system. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image 15/461 . Tab & Field defines the presentation of tables and columns within each window. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. for instance a slection list. Tab and Field The Window. • WindowType: The Window Type indicates the type of window being defined (Maintain. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. depending on the tab that is edited. 1. For customizations. For System Admin use only.

Tab and Field .16/461 Figure 1: Window.

• IsSingleRow: The Single Row Layout checkbox indicates if the default display type for this window is a single row as opposed to multi row. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window. • IsInfoTab: The Accounting Tab checkbox indicates if this window contains accounting information. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If the level is 0. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• AD Color ID: Color for backgrounds or indicators • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. comment or help about the use of this item. etc. Level 1 entries are dependent on level 0. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • TabLevel: Hierarchical level of the tab.2 AD Tab The Tab Tab defines each Tab within a Window. 1. it is the top entity. Each Tab contains a discrete selection of fields. 17/461 . • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system.

• OrderByClause: The ORDER BY Clause indicates the SQL ORDER BY clause to use for record selection • CommitWarning: Warning or information displayed when committing the record Not implemented yet • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system..otherwise it is determined that the Order Column has a value of one or greater 18/461 . It may not be updated. .columnname). If defined. Fully qualified means tablename. • WhereClause: The Where Clause indicates the SQL WHERE clause to use for record selection.• IsTranslationTab: The Translation Tab checkbox indicate if a tab contains translation information. it decides. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read. • AD ColumnSortYesNo ID: If a Included Column is defined. sort. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table • HasTree: The Has Tree checkbox indicates if this window displays a tree metaphor.columnname.). It should be fully qualified (i. if a column is active in the ordering . the Order By replaces the default Order By clause. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • ImportFields: Create Fields from Table Columns.e. tablename. this process will create the fields that don’t exists in the tab but which exist in the correspondent table. • AD ColumnSortOrder ID: Integer Column of the table determining the order (display. The WHERE clause is added to the query.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • ImageURL: URL of image. the included tab is displayed as multi-row table. An image can be stored as an URL or as binary data. name the auxiliar inout and define a validation code.4 AD AuxiliarInput To configure an auxiliar input.• IsSortTab: The Tab determines the Order. • BinaryData: The Binary field stores binary data. you can force that all payments are done in cash. when selecting the payment method. copy the entity and select User! • Included Tab ID: You can include a Tab in a Tab. 1. 19/461 . • FilterClause: Filter clause • EditReference: The form referenced in the edition command 1. but retrieved at runtime. The image can be a gif. You cannot share data between Clients. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. The image is not stored in the database. you need to select the corresponding tab. If displayed in single row record. For example. jpeg or png. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. For customizations. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.3 AD Image This table stores images that can be used in different places.

5 AD FieldGroup A field group is defined as a fields agrupation inside a tab. Quantities) • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 1.• Ad Auxiliarinput Id: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 20/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.6 AD Field The Field table defines the Fields displayed within a tab. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Amounts. You cannot share data between Clients. • Code: The Validation Code is the code that will be executed to determine the rule. 1. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Changes made to the Field Tab become visible after restart due to caching • AD Field ID: The Field identifies a field on a database table. • AD FieldGroup ID: The Field Group indicates the logical group that this field belongs to (History.

Quantities) • IsDisplayed: If the field is displayed. comment or help about the use of this item.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table • AD FieldGroup ID: The Field Group indicates the logical group that this field belongs to (History. • IsHeading: The Heading Only checkbox indicates if just the label will display on the screen 21/461 . It may not be updated. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • SortNo: The Record Sort No indicates the ascending sort sequence of the records • IsSameLine: The Same Line checkbox indicates that the field will display on the same line as the previous field. Amounts. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. if it is actually displayed • DisplayLogic: • DisplayLength: Display length is the size that will be appear for the field. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window. it can be different that the actual size of the column (note that if it is bigger than the column the data will be truncated to the column size). • IsCentrallyMaintained: The Centrally Maintained checkbox indicates if the Name. Description and Help maintained in ’System Element’ table or ’Window’ table. the field Display Logic will determine at runtime. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read.

• IsFieldOnly: The Field Only checkbox indicates that the column will display without a label. Not implemented yet • IsEncrypted: Display encryption . • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. 22/461 .all characters are displayed as ’*’.e. otherwise it only will be displayed in the edition view. Data storage encryption (i. copy the entity and select User! • ShowInRelation: When this field is set as ’Y’ the field will be shown in the relation view (as well as in the edition view). For customizations. you will not be able to report the data via report tools) is set in the Column definition. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.

comment or help about the use of this item. For customizations. A view is always treated as read only in the system.2 Table and column and attachments The Table and Column defines all tables with their columns. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • TableName: The DB Table Name indicates the name of the table in database. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • IsView: This is a view rather than a table. copy the entity and select User! • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.1 AD Table In Table table are stored all the tables used in the application. This data should be the same as the defined physically in the DB. 2. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. The System Element is the Central Repository for Field Names Descriptions and Help/Comments. The Validation Rules defines all dynamic rules used when entering and maintaining columns and fields. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 23/461 . • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. The File is used to store attributes of an attachment.

24/461 Figure 2: Table and column and attachments .

If records cannot be deleted. • ImportTable: Import Table Columns from Database. this process will create in the application dictionary those columns defined in the table (in DB) but non-existing in the column table (of the application dictionary). • IsChangeLog: If selected. ¡BR¿Reference means that the data in this system is read only -¿ ¡BR¿Local means that the data in this system is not replicated to other systems .2 AD Column Defines the columns of a table The Used in Column Tab defines the table and column this element resides in. Not implemented yet • ReplicationType: The Type of data Replication determines the directon of the data replication. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid.¡BR¿Merge means that the d • PO Window ID: Window for Purchase Order (AP) Zooms • IsDefaultAcct: Is default account Not implemented yet • SQL Record Identifier: SQL Record Identifier 2. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table 25/461 . • LoadSeq: Sequence of the table • IsSecurityEnabled: The Security Enabled checkbox indicates that user access to the data in this table can be restricted using Roles.• AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule. Not implemented yet • IsDeleteable: The Records Deleteable checkbox indicates if a record can be deleted from the database. you can only deselect the Active flag • IsHighVolume: The High Volume Checkbox indicates if a search screen will display as opposed to a pick list for selecting records from this table. a log of all changes is maintained.

• FieldLength: The Length indicates the length of a column as defined in the database.in format @Variable@ .Window values (all Picks. • DefaultValue: The defaults are evaluated in the order of definition. and DateDoc/DateAcct) c) SQL code with the tag: @SQL=SELECT something AS DefaultValue FROM . • Version: The Version indicates the version of this table definition. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. comment or help about the use of this item. • AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule. #AD Client ID . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.C Calendar ID . copy the entity and select User! • ColumnName: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database.g. ’Text’ or 123 b) Variables . It must be specified if the data type is Table or List. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. a) Literals:.. There can be 26/461 . The SQL statement can contain variables. #Date. DateFormat . You cannot share data between Clients. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.Global defaults: e. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. the first not null value becomes the default value of the column. RadioButtons. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Reference Value ID: The Reference Value indicates where the reference values are stored.Login e. CheckBoxes.g. C AcctSchema ID.. #AD Org ID.g. For customizations. The values are separated by comma or semicolon.Accounting Schema: e.

• VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with.all characters are displayed as ’*’. • ReadOnlyLogic: Logic to determine if field is read only (applies only when field is read-write) • IsIdentifier: The Identifier checkbox indicates that this column is part of the identifier or key for this table. Not implemented yet • ValueMin: The Minimum Value indicates the lowest allowable value for a field. • IsUpdateable: The Updateable checkbox indicates if a field can be updated by the user. • IsKey: The key column must also be display sequence 0 in the field definition and may be hidden. you will not be able to report the data via report tools) is set in the Column definition.no other value other than the SQL statement. The default is only evaluated. • IsParent: The Parent checkbox indicates if this column is a link to the parent table.e. Default definitions are ignored for record columns as Key. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. the column is listed in the first find window tab and in the selection part of the window 27/461 . Client as well as Buttons. • ValueMax: The Maximum Value indicates the highest allowable value for a field • IsSelectionColumn: If selected. Parent. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database. if no user preference is defined. • IsEncrypted: Display encryption . Data storage encryption (i.

• IsSyncDatabase: When selected. • IsSessionAttr: Checking this field the data for this column will be stored as session attribute so its content will be accessible from other tab. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system.3 AD Callout This table defines the callouts. callouts are Java classes that are executed when the content of a filed is modified. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 28/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. descriptions and terminology for a database column. • IsSecondaryKey: Is secondary key • IsDesencryptable: When Is Desencryptable field is ’Y’ the content of this column will be saved in a desencryptable way. 2. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. the database column definition is updated based on your entries in the Column definition of the Application Dictionary. • AD Callout ID: The callout that will be fired when the content of a is modified.• AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help. • AD Callout ID: The callout that will be fired when the content of a is modified. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. copy the entity and select User! 2. • Type: The Type indicates the type of validation that will occur. Java Script or Java Language. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.4 AD Val Rule The Validation Rules Tab defines all dynamic rules used when entering and maintaining columns and fields. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • ColumnName: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule.5 AD Element The Element Tab defines each system level element. You cannot share data between Clients. This can be SQL. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. For customizations.2. • Code: The Validation Code is the code that will be executed to determine the rule. • AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help. 29/461 . descriptions and terminology for a database column. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid.

comment or help about the use of this item. The max length is 2000 characters. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Datatype ID: Defines what kind of file is (txt. pdf.. You cannot share data between Clients. xls. For customizations. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • PO Name: Name on PO Screens • PO PrintName: Print name on PO Screens/Reports • PO Description: Description in PO Screens • PO Help: Help for PO Screens 2. • C File ID: Attached file • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.. copy the entity and select User! • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence.• EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 30/461 .). The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.6 C File In this table are stored the files (using the name field) attached to different windows.

• AD Datatype ID: Type of file • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 31/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. This key may belong to any table that’s why this column is generic and not specific for any table. • AD Record ID: Record contains the key of the record the file is attached to.7 AD DataType Data type table contains the different types of files that can be attached to the records of the application. 2.• Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • Format: Format is the description of the data type for the attachable files.

For customizations. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 3. copy the entity and select User! 3. Not implemented yet • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. comment or help about the use of this item.2 AD Ref List The List Validation Tab defines lists to validate data • AD Ref List ID: The Reference List field indicates a list of reference values from a database tables. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with.1 AD Reference The Reference Tab defines the references that are used to validate data • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. table or data type validation. You cannot share data between Clients. These include list. Reference lists populate drop down list boxes in data entry screens 32/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.3 Reference The Reference defines each field type and its parameters. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • ValidationType: The Validation Type indicates the validation method to use.

33/461 Figure 3: Reference .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. C Order). You cannot share data between Clients. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. copy the entity and select User! 3. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. You cannot share data between Clients.3 AD Ref Table The Table Validation Tab defines tables to validate data • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.g. 34/461 . If you leave the search key empty. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • AD Key: The Key Column indicates that this the unique identifier of a record on this table. For customizations. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

For customizations.5 AD Ref Search Column • AD Ref Search Column ID: 35/461 . Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.4 AD Ref Search • AD Ref Search ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • WhereClause: The Where Clause indicates the SQL WHERE clause to use for record selection. The WHERE clause is added to the query. • IsValueDisplayed: The Display Value checkbox indicates if the value column will display with the display column. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside.• AD Display: The Display Column indicates the column that will display. copy the entity and select User! 3.columnname. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table 3. Fully qualified means tablename. • OrderByClause: The ORDER BY Clause indicates the SQL ORDER BY clause to use for record selection • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.

• AD Ref Search ID: • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Columnname: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Columntype: • Column Suffix: 36/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.

• AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • Action: The Action field indicates the Action to be performed for this element. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read. 37/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 4. It may not be updated. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.4 Menu The Menu defines the Menu which will display. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Menus are used to control the display of those screens a user has access to. • AD Menu ID: The Menu identifies a unique Menu.1 AD Menu The Menu Tab defines the tree structured menu which will be used for the selected Organization. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. The menu items that each user will see depends upon the security defined. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system.

38/461 Figure 4: Menu .

• AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. 39/461 . • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. • AD Workbench ID: Collection of windows. For customizations. copy the entity and select User! • Url: The URL defines an online address for this Business Partner. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. reports • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.

For customizations. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.5 Process. You cannot share data between Clients. If you leave the search key empty. 5. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The Tasks defines the different tasks used in workflows and the access level for those tasks. The Report & Process is used to define the parameters and access rules for every Report and Process within the system. the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system.g. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. C Order). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. Form and Task The Forms defines any window which is not automatically generated. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. comment or help about the use of this item. copy the entity and select User! • IsUserStartable: The User can start Process checkbox indicates that this process can be initiated by the user (as opposed to system initiated) Not implemented yet 40/461 .1 AD Process The Report and Process Tab defines each report and process run in the system.

41/461 Figure 5: Process. Form and Task .

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. this field counts how many times the process has been executed. • AD ReportView ID: The Report View indicates the view used to generate this report. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Process Para ID: Process Parameter identifies the parameters of a process or report. • Statistic Seconds: Internal statistics how many seconds have been used the process while it was being executed.• ProcedureName: The Procedure indicates the name of the database procedure called by this report or process. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Statistic Count: Internal statistics. • AD PrintFormat ID: The print format determines how data is rendered for print. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 42/461 . • IsBackground: The background process run with the application in a planned time 5. • Classname: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process. • IsReport: The Report checkbox indicates that this record is a report as opposed to a process • IsDirectPrint: The Direct Print checkbox indicates that this report will print without a print dialog box being displayed.2 AD Process Para The Report Parameter table defines any parameters required to execute a report or process.

g. DateFormat . The default is only evaluated. #Date. and DateDoc/DateAcct) c) SQL code with the tag: @SQL=SELECT something AS DefaultValue FROM . comment or help about the use of this item..Login e. the first not null value becomes the default value of the column. • IsCentrallyMaintained: The Centrally Maintained checkbox indicates if the Name. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database. The values are separated by comma or semicolon. #AD Org ID. It must be specified if the data type is Table or List. if no user 43/461 . a) Literals:.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.Window values (all Picks.Accounting Schema: e. There can be no other value other than the SQL statement.in format @Variable@ .. The SQL statement can contain variables.Global defaults: e.g. • AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. C AcctSchema ID. ’Text’ or 123 b) Variables . RadioButtons. • DefaultValue: The defaults are evaluated in the order of definition. #AD Client ID . • FieldLength: The Length indicates the length of a column as defined in the database. Description and Help maintained in ’System Element’ table or ’Window’ table. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Reference Value ID: The Reference Value indicates where the reference values are stored. • IsRange: The Range checkbox indicates that this parameter is a range of values. CheckBoxes.C Calendar ID . • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • ColumnName: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database.g.

Client as well as Buttons. descriptions and terminology for a database column.preference is defined. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.Accounting Schema: e. Not implemented yet • ValueMin: The Minimum Value indicates the lowest allowable value for a field.Global defaults: e. C AcctSchema ID. There can be no other value other than the SQL statement. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. DateFormat . The values are separated by comma or semicolon. RadioButtons. if no user preference is defined. the first not null value becomes the default value of the column. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.g..Window values (all Picks. For System Admin use only. For customizations. Client as well as Buttons.C Calendar ID .Login e. ’Text’ or 123 b) Variables . Default definitions are ignored for record columns as Key.. 44/461 .3 AD Form The Forms Tab defines any window which is not automatically generated. a) Literals:.g. copy the entity and select User! 5. CheckBoxes. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. and DateDoc/DateAcct) c) SQL code with the tag: @SQL=SELECT something AS DefaultValue FROM . #AD Client ID . Parent. • DefaultValue2: The defaults are evaluated in the order of definition.in format @Variable@ . The SQL statement can contain variables. The default is only evaluated. • ValueMax: The Maximum Value indicates the highest allowable value for a field • AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help. Default definitions are ignored for record columns as Key. #Date.g. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with. Parent. You cannot share data between Clients. #AD Org ID.

• AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. • OS Command: The OS Command is for optionally defining a command to that will be part of this task. For example it can be used to starting a back up process or performing a file transfer. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. comment or help about the use of this item. 45/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. copy the entity and select User! 5.4 AD Task The Task Tab defines the unique tasks that will be used. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. For customizations. • Classname: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process. comment or help about the use of this item.

• EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. 46/461 . copy the entity and select User! • ClassName: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process. For customizations. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. For customizations. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. 6. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.2 AD WF Node The Node Tab defines each Node or step in this Workflow. • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. comment or help about the use of this item. the access level for the Workflow and the Nodes or Steps within the Workflow. 47/461 . copy the entity and select User! 6.1 AD Workflow The Workflow Tab defines Workflows in the system. • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.6 Workflow The Workflow defines Workflows in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

48/461 Figure 6: Workflow .

• IsCentrallyMaintained: The Centrally Maintained checkbox indicates if the Name. in a specified sequence and optionally including approvals • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. Description and Help maintained in ’System Element’ table or ’Window’ table. A workflow is a grouping of related tasks.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Action: The Action field indicates the Action to be performed for this element. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. copy the entity and select User! • Xposition: Absolute X (horizontal) position in 1/72 of an inch Not implemented yet • Yposition: Absolute Y (vertical) position in 1/72 of an inch Not implemented yet 49/461 . comment or help about the use of this item. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. For customizations. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique workflow. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 6. Not implemented yet 50/461 . • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. After the edition.6. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.3 AD WF Node Trl Allows the translation of any workflow node of the application. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. comment or help about the use of this item. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD WF Next ID: The Next Node indicates the next step or task in this Workflow.4 AD WF NodeNext The Next Nodes Tab defines the order or Nodes or Steps in a Workflow. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Condition: The Condition field identifies the condition that must be met before the Workflow can proceed to the next task. the window must be regenerated.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 7. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information.1 AD TreeNodePR This table defines the relations of nodes for trees of products. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record 51/461 . • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 7. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels.2 AD TreeNodeBP This table defines relations of nodes for trees of Business Partners. You cannot share data between Clients. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node.7 Tree The Tree and Node Image defines the descriptors and images that will be used when a Tree is displayed. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node.

52/461 Figure 7: Tree .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system.3 AD TreeNode This table defines the relations of nodes for generic trees. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Node ID: Identifies a tree node.• SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 7. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node. You cannot share data between Clients. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 7.4 AD TreeBar This table defines the relations between nodes for bookmarks trees. You cannot share data between Clients. 53/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system.

you may define one tree for your Products and another tree for your Business Partners. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels.5 AD Tree The Tree table defines all the trees that will be used in the application. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 54/461 . Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information.7. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node. For example. • IsAllNodes: If this field is checked all nodes are included 7. • TreeType: The Tree Type / Area field determines the type of tree this is. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.6 AD TreeNodeMM This table defines the relations of nodes for menu tree. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

Whenever a process is called a new line is added to this table including the process identifier and the record that called the process. Every time a process is executed a new instance of it is created.Change the way document numbers are generated. 55/461 . log The Message defines the Message Text and Message Tips for each system generated message. You may add a prefix or a suffix or change the current number. messages. • AD PInstance ID: Process Instance identifies the instance of a process. • ErrorMsg: In this filed is stored the error message in case the process fails. • Record ID: The Record ID is the internal unique identifier of a record • IsProcessing: When the process is being accomplished this record has ’Y’ value. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. otherwise it has ’N’. The system creates messages while performing processes.1 AD PInstance This table is used internally by the application. sequences.8 Internals: process execution. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 8. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Result: The Result indicates the result of any action taken on this request. The Sequence defines how document numbers will be sequenced. You cannot share data between Clients.

log . messages. sequences.56/461 Figure 8: Internals: process execution.

• P Number: Number passed as parameter to a process instance. • Info To: The Information displays data from the source document line. • P String: String passed as parameter to a process instance. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • ParameterName: Name describing the parameter. • Info: The Information displays data from the source document line. • P Number To: Number passed as maximun range as parameter to a process instance. • P String To: String passed as maximun string range to a process instance. 8. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. Every time a process is executed a new instance of it is created. • AD PInstance ID: Process Instance identifies the instance of a process.2 AD PInstance Para Process Instance Parameter contains the values of the parameters that are passed to a process instance. Every time a process is executed a new instance of it is created. 57/461 .8. • AD PInstance ID: Process Instance identifies the instance of a process.3 AD PInstance Log Maintains a log of process instances. • P Date To: Date passed as maximun date as parameter to a process instance. • P Date: Date passed as parameter to a process instance.

• AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Message ID: Information and Error messages • Reference: The Reference displays the source document number. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. 58/461 . • Record ID: The Record ID is the internal unique identifier of a record • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • P Msg: Process Message 8.• Log ID: Log identifier • P Date: Date passed as parameter to a process instance. • AD Note ID: Identifies a System Notice • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.4 AD Note The Notice Tab provides a method of viewing messages that are generated by this system when performing processes. • P ID: Process ID • P Number: Number passed as parameter to a process instance. You cannot share data between Clients.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IncrementNo: The Increment indicates the number to increment the last document number by to arrive at the next sequence number • StartNo: The Start Number indicates the starting position in the line or field number in the line • CurrentNext: The Current Next indicates the next number to use for this document • CurrentNextSys: This field is for system use only and should not be modified. • AD Sequence ID: The Sequence defines the numbering sequence to be used for documents. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsAudited: The Activate Audit checkbox indicates if an audit trail of numbers generated will be kept. These can also include a alpha suffix and / or prefix. 59/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with. • IsTableID: The Used for Record ID checkbox indicates if the document id will be used as the key to the record • Prefix: The Prefix indicates the characters to print in front of the document number. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • IsAutoSequence: The Auto Numbering checkbox indicates if the system will assign the next number automatically. You cannot share data between Clients.5 AD Sequence The Sequence Tab defines the numeric sequencing to use for documents.8.

• MsgText: The Message Text indicates the message that will display • MsgTip: The Message Tip defines additional help or information about this message. C Order).• Suffix: The Suffix indicates the characters to append to the document number. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • StartNewYear: The Restart Sequence Every Year checkbox indicates that the documents sequencing should return to the starting number on the first day of the year. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.6 AD Message The Message Tab displays error message text and menu messages • AD Message ID: Information and Error messages • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. this texts are stored in order to be used during the translation process.g.7 AD TextInterfaces Texts for manual interfaces. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. copy the entity and select User! 8. 8. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. 60/461 . Valid message types are Informational. You cannot share data between Clients. If you leave the search key empty. For customizations. Menu and Error. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • AD Textinterfaces ID: Identifies a text in a manually created window. • MsgType: The Message Type indicates the type of message being defined.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Join Group2: • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system.8 AD Dimension The dimensions are needed for the multidimensional analisys reports • AD Dimension ID: Identifies a dimension for multidemensional analisys reports • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information. • Filename: 8. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • Columnname: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Join Group1: • Tablename: The DB Table Name indicates the name of the table in database. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 61/461 .

9 AD Month It is necessary to configurate the months of the year to the terms of the year. • Quarter: Defines in which quarter of the year is placed the month 62/461 . • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. If you leave the search key empty. • AD Month ID: A month of the year. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.g. C Order). • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. the system automatically creates a numeric number.8.

• AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • Action: The Action field indicates the Action to be performed for this element. processes.. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. forms. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. reports • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. • AD Workbench ID: Collection of windows. • ClassName: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process.9 Model objects mapping The Model Objects Mapping defines all the mappings for each of the application elements (tabs. You cannot share data between Clients.1 AD Model Object • AD Model Object ID: Identifies an object of the dictionary. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Callout ID: The callout that will be fired when the content of a is modified. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.. 63/461 . • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window.) 9.

64/461 Figure 9: Model objects mapping .

You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Model Object ID: Identifies an object of the dictionary. 65/461 .9. • MappingName: • Isdefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.2 AD Model Object Mapping This table contains the mappings (how the classes are accessed) for the objects of the dictionary. • AD Model Object Mapping ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

Otherwise the language is only used for printing documents.din.html or . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 66/461 .10 Translations The Translations allows you to define multiple parallel language for users.If a language is a System Language.ics. 10. fr CN .http://www. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.Canadian French). This allows users to access the same data but have the application elements appear in different languages.edu/pub/ietf/http/related/iso639. You cannot share data between Clients. we suggest using the Java convention of country and language (e.http://www. The Language needs to be a (verified) System Language • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If the language is not supplied.g. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. you can change the User Interface to this language (after translation). • LanguageISO: The ISO Language Code indicates the standard ISO code for a language in lower case.htm • IsBaseLanguage: • IsSystemLanguage: Select.txt • CountryCode: For details . the system allows you to just translate elements for printing documents. Otherwise. you can translate the terms yourself.unece. Please notify your system administrator to run the language maintenance scripts to enable the use of this language.1 AD Language If you want to add an additional User Interface language. Information can be found at http://www. For the language code.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1.uci. if you want to have translated screens available in this language.org/trade/rec/rec03en. select System Language.

67/461 Figure 10: Translations .

You cannot share data between Clients. It is important to check the translated option. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.2 AD Window Trl This tab contains the windows translation to different languages. 68/461 . • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.3 AD Process Trl Shows report tab translation for several languages This tab contains the process translation to different languages. It is important to check the translated option.• AD Language ID: 10. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 10. You cannot share data between Clients. comment or help about the use of this item.

comment or help about the use of this item. You cannot share data between Clients. • CommitWarning: Warning or information displayed when committing the record • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 69/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.4 AD Tab Trl Allows the translation of any tab of the application. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 10. comment or help about the use of this item. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. the window must be regenerated.After the edition.

descriptions and terminology for a database column.10. The max length is 2000 characters. It is important to check the translated option. 70/461 . • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.5 AD Element Trl This tab contains the elements translation to different languages. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence. • PO Name: Name on PO Screens • PO PrintName: Print name on PO Screens/Reports • PO Description: Description in PO Screens • PO Help: Help for PO Screens • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. comment or help about the use of this item.

which are not centrally maintained. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.7 AD Reference Trl • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the window must be regenerated. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. After the edition. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 10. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You need only to translate Fields. You cannot share data between Clients. Quantities) • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. comment or help about the use of this item. 71/461 . • AD FieldGroup ID: The Field Group indicates the logical group that this field belongs to (History.10. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. You cannot share data between Clients. Amounts. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.6 AD FieldGroup Trl This tab contains field group translations to different languages Run Synchronize Terminology to update menu translation.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 10. Process. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.8 AD Process Para Trl Shows parameter tab translation for several languages • AD Process Para ID: Process Parameter identifies the parameters of a process or report. You only need to translate Summary level items. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. Run Synchronize Terminology to update menu translation. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.10. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 72/461 . etc. Menus are used to control the display of those screens a user has access to. comment or help about the use of this item. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.9 AD Menu Trl Menu translations are derived from Window. • AD Menu ID: The Menu identifies a unique Menu.

10. • MsgText: The Message Text indicates the message that will display • MsgTip: The Message Tip defines additional help or information about this message.10 AD Message Trl This tab contains the messages translation to different languages. After the edition. Allows the translation of any field of the application. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. the window must be regenerated. 73/461 .• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Message ID: Information and Error messages • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. if centrally maintained. It is important to check the translated option. 10. You only need to translate not centrally maintained Fields. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Field ID: The Field identifies a field on a database table.11 AD Field Trl Fields are automatically translated.

13 AD Task Trl Allows the translation of any task of the application. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 10. 10. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. After the edition. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the window must be regenerated. comment or help about the use of this item. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Istranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 74/461 .12 AD TextInterfaces Trl • AD Textinterfaces ID: Identifies a text in a manually created window. • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information.

10. 10. the window must be regenerated.15 AD Form Trl This tab contains form tab data translation to different languages Allows the translation of any form of the application. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 75/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. After the edition. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. the window must be regenerated.After the edition. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. comment or help about the use of this item. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.14 AD Workflow Trl Allows the translation of any workflow of the application.

16 AD Ref List Trl Allows the translation of any reference list of the application. • AD Ref List ID: The Reference List field indicates a list of reference values from a database tables. the window must be regenerated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.• AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Reference lists populate drop down list boxes in data entry screens • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. After the edition. comment or help about the use of this item. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 76/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 10. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

You cannot share data between Clients. 77/461 . the window must be regenerated.17 AD WF Node Trl Allows the translation of any workflow node of the application.10. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. After the edition. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

You can add users to the role. The Table and Column defines all tables with their columns The User allows you to define each User of the system. Roles control access to windows. For a client an Administrator and User role are predefined. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Prior to entering or importing products. Prior to generating Orders you must define your customers. • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. vendors and employees. 11. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. reports. You may add additional roles to control access for specific functionality or data. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. The Maintain Tasks defines the different tasks used in workflows and the access level for those tasks. you must define your vendors. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Tab & Field defines the presentation of tables and columns within each window. Passwords are required to identify authorized users. You cannot share data between Clients. 78/461 . Users can log into the system and have access to functionality via one or more roles. tasks.1 AD User The User Tab defines the log in for Users who have access to the system. For System Admin use only. The Role allows you to define the different roles that users of this system will have. The Window. The Workflow defines Workflows in the system. etc. The User identifies a unique user in the system. This includes customers. the access level for the Workflow and the Nodes or Steps within the Workflow. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The Report & Process is used to define the parameters and access rules for every Report and Process within the system.11 Access Maintain Data Access Roles of Roles/Responsibilties The Business Partner allows you do define any party with whom you transact. he Forms Window defines any window which is not automatically generated.

79/461 Figure 11: Access .

• PA GoalPrivate ID: The Personal Goals displays goals that a user will set for themselves. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. • EmailUser: The user name in the mail system is usually the string before the @ of your email address.smith@company. joe. • Supervisor ID: The Supervisor indicates who will be used for forwarding and escalating issues for this user. • PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against. Employee or Salesperson • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • EmailUserPW: Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails. • Comments: The Comments field allows for free form entry of additional information.com).• Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. • Title: The Title indicates the name that an entity is referred to as.g. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location 80/461 . Customer. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. This can include Vendor. Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails.

and inter-organization transactions. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 81/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.2 AD User Roles The User Roles Tab define the Roles each user may have. • Birthday: Birthday or Anniversary day • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. tasks. • LastResult: The Last Result identifies the result of the last contact made.• LastContact: The Last Contact indicates the date that this Business Partner Contact was last contacted. processes and workflows that a User has access to. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. The Roles will determine what windows. with centralized services. The User Assignment Tab displays Users who have been defined for this Role. Not implemented yet • Firstname: First Name of the contact • Lastname: Last name of the contact • UserName: Name that identifies the user in the System 11.

• ClientList: Indicates the Clients (by client id) that this Role can access.’. 82/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • UserLevel: The User Level field determines if users of this Role will have access to System level data. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You can give users access to this role and modify the access of this role to windows. Client level data or Client and Organization level data. Multiple Organizations are delimited by a comma ’. processes and reports as well as tasks. Multiple Clients are delimited by a comma ’. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. forms. ¡BR¿If the Role User Level is Manual.11.3 AD Role Define the role and add the client and organizations the role has access to. Organization level data. • OrgList: The Organization List indicates the Organizations (by organization id) that this Role can access. • AD Tree Menu ID: Tree Menu • IsManual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. You cannot share data between Clients.’. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AmtApproval: The Approval Amount field indicates the amount limit this Role has for approval of documents. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. the as Select Role for with Data Access Restrictions • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System.

83/461 . The Task Access Tab defines the Roles that will have access to this task and the type of access each Role is granted. 11. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. The Window Access Tab defines the Windows and type of access that this Role is granted. 11. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. You cannot share data between Clients.5 AD Window Access The Window Access Tab defines the Roles which have access to this Window. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. The Report Access Tab determines who can access a report or process • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.11. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated.4 AD Task Access The Task Access Tab defines the Task and type of access that this Role is granted.6 AD Process Access The Process Access Tab defines the Processes and type of access that this Role is granted.

You cannot share data between Clients.8 AD Form Access The Form Access Tab defines the Forms and type of access that this Role is granted. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. The Forms Access Tab defines the access rules for this form • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. 11. The Workflow Access Tab defines the Roles who have access to this Workflow.7 AD Workflow Access The Workflow Access Tab defines the Workflows and type of access that this Role is granted. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. 11. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. 84/461 .

the Role can(not) access all data of this table. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read. the role can ONLY access the data specified 85/461 . 11. • IsExclude: If selected.9 AD Role OrgAccess Add the client organizations the user has access to. If not selected. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. the role cannot access the data specified. You cannot share data between Clients. even if the role has access to the functionality • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. 11.• IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated.10 AD Table Access If listed here. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. It may not be updated.

din.unece. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. The following notations are used: @C@=City @P@=Postal @A@=PostalAdd @R@=Region 86/461 . If this checkbox is selected. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. Region and Location The Countries.org/trade/rec/rec03en. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.http://www.html or . the Region Tab is accessible.1 C Country The Country Tab defines any country in which you do business. It defines the format of the address as well as associating Regions with Countries and Cities with Regions or Countries.12 Country. 12. • ExpressionPhone: Phone Format • DisplaySequence: The Address Print format defines the format to be used when this address prints. The Location defines the address data within the system. Regions and Cities defines the different entities that can be used in any address field. Values entered here are referenced in location records for Business Partners.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1. • CountryCode: For details .http://www. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.htm • HasRegion: The Country has Region checkbox is selected if the Country being defined is divided into regions. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

87/461 Figure 12: Country. Region and Location .

88/461 . Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • ExpressionPostal Add: Additional Postal Format • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.• ExpressionPostal: Postal code Format • HasPostal Add: The Additional Postal Code checkbox indicates if this address uses an additional Postal Code.2 C Country Trl Translation • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 12. If it is selected an additional field displays for entry of the additional Postal Code.

apartment number or similar information. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. This tab is enabled only if the Has Region checkbox is selected for the Country. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity.• DisplaySequence: The Address Print format defines the format to be used when this address prints. 12. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. It can be used for building location. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.4 C Location The Location Tab defines the location of an Organization. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. 89/461 . • Address1: The Address 1 identifies the address for an entity’s location • Address2: The Address 2 provides additional address information for an entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The following notations are used: @C@=City @P@=Postal @A@=PostalAdd @R@=Region 12.3 C Region The Region Tab defines a Region within a Country. You cannot share data between Clients.

• Postal: The Postal Code field identifies the postal code for this entity’s address. 90/461 . if appropriate. • Postal Add: The Additional ZIP or Postal Code identifies. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country.• City: The City identifies a unique City for this Country or Region. • C City ID: City in a country • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. any additional Postal Code information.

Each Client defines the accounting parameters (Accounting Schema. Tree definition. • ReleaseNo: Internal Release Number • SupportUnits: • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. You cannot share data between Clients. • ReplicationType: The Type of data Replication determines the directon of the data replication.Only one Record .13 System. Do NOT create additional records!! • AD System ID: Common System Definition • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. An Organization is often a legal entity or sub-unit for which documents and transactions are processed 13.1 AD System Common System Definition. Not implemented yet • UserName: Name that identifies the user in the System • Info: The Information displays data from the source document line. Org and Session info. The Organization Window allows you to define and maintain Organizational entities. Each Client will have one or more Organizations reporting to it. Non Monetary UOM’s). Not implemented yet • Version: The Version indicates the version of this table definition. Preferences Common System Definition . ¡BR¿Reference means that the data in this system is read only -¿ ¡BR¿Local 91/461 . History of Online or Web Sessions The Client is the highest level of an independent business entity. Passwords are required to identify authorized users. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Client.Please no not add additional records.

92/461 Figure 13: System. Org and Session info. Preferences . Client.

2 AD Client The Client Definition Tab defines a unique client.smith@company.000 for client data.com) and should be a valid address. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. If you create a new client here. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The address must be filly qualified (e. If you leave the search key empty.means that the data in this system is not replicated to other systems .¡BR¿Merge means that the d • IDRangeStart: The ID Range allows to restrict the range of the internally used IDs.000. and IMAP to process incoming mail. The standard rages are 0-899. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. alerts and escalation are sent from this email address as well as delivery information if the sales rep does not have an email account. 93/461 .999. The ID range is on a per table basis. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the system automatically creates a numeric number. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.g.999 but can easily be extended. You cannot share data between Clients. • IDRangeEnd: The ID Range allows to restrict the range of the internally used IDs. you will not be abl • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.Do not create a new client in this window. Please note that the ID range is NOT enforced. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order).999 for the Application Dictionary 900.000-999. • RequestEMail: EMails for requests. • SMTPHost: The host name of the Mail Server for this client with SMTP services to send mail. joe.g. The standard system limit is 9. 13.999.Please note that the ID range is NOT enforced. but use Initial Client Setup (System Administrator Role) to set up the required security and access rules.999 for Application Dictionary customizations/extensions and ¿ 1.

webParam4 94/461 .. you enable multi lingual documents and need to maintain translations for entities used in documents (examples: Products. • RequestUserPW: Password of the user name (ID) for mail processing • RequestFolder: Email folder used to read emails to process as requests. URLs or entire HTML blocks.webParam1 • WebParam2: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. that the base language is always English. passwords. • WebParam1: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • WebDir: The Web Directory defines the look and feel for the Web interface. passwords. Required. Requires IMAP services.¡BR¿Please note. • IsMultiLingualDocument: If selected. If yes. URLs or entire HTML blocks. The access is via ctx. The access is via ctx. Payment Terms. URLs or entire HTML blocks.webParam2 • WebParam3: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. passwords. passwords.). • IsSmtpAuthorization: Some email servers require authentification before sending emails. .• RequestUser: EMail user name for requests. users are required to define their email user name and password. delivery will fail. URLs or entire HTML blocks.. If left empty the default mailbox (INBOX) will be used. If authentification is required and no user name and password is required. The path/directory is accessed by the application server and may not be accessible to clients. alerts and escalation are sent from this email address as well as delivery information if the sales rep does not have an email account. The access is via ctx.webParam3 • WebParam4: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. The access is via ctx. • DocumentDir: Directory to store documents by the application server. if your mail server requires authentification as well as for processing incoming mails.

The accounting rules and high level defaults are defined here. • C AcctSchema1 ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used accounting such as costing method. The access is via ctx. Multiple calendars can be used. This is e. • C AcctSchema2 ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • WebInfo: Display HTML Info in the Web Store . a confirmation is sent to the EMail addess of the customer from the request EMail address copying this email address when entered. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. The Calendar is used to determine if a period is open or closed.3 AD ClientInfo The Client Info Tab defines the details for each client.• WebOrderEMail: When processig a web order. business practice in the US. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar. currency and calendar.webParam5 13. • IsDiscountLineAmt: If the payment discount is calculated from line amounts only. If not selected the total invoice amount is used to calculate the payment discount.by default in the header. 95/461 . the tax and charge amounts are not included. URLs or entire HTML blocks. currency and calendar. URLs or entire HTML blocks.g. For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30. The access is via ctx. passwords. • Acct2 Active: The Second Accounting Schema indicates an alternate set of rules to use for generating reports. • WebParam6: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos.webParam6 • WebParam5: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. passwords.

• Acct3 Active: The Third Accounting Schema indicates an alternate set of rules to use for generating reports. • C AcctSchema3 ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • C UOM Volume ID: The Standard UOM for Volume indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by volume in a document. • C UOM Weight ID: The Standard UOM for Weight indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by weight in a document. • C UOM Length ID: The Standard UOM for Length indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by length in a document. • C UOM Time ID: The Standard UOM for Time indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by time in a document. • AD Tree Menu ID: Tree Menu • AD Tree Org ID: Organization Tree • AD Tree BPartner ID: Business Partner Tree • AD Tree Project ID: Project Tree • AD Tree SalesRegion ID: • AD Tree Product ID: Product Tree • M ProductFreight ID: • C BPartnerCashTrx ID: When creating a new Business Partner from the Business Partner Search Field (right-click: Create), the selected business partner is used as a template, e.g. to define price list, payment terms, etc.

96/461

• PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing, margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • AllowNegativeStock: Allow negative stock • Checkorderorg: The checkorderorg identifies the order organization and the business partner organization and makes sure both are the same. • Checkinoutorg: The Checkinoutorg identifies the shipment organization and the business partner organization and makes sure both are the same • Groupacctinvlines: Group Accounting Invoice Lines

13.4

AD Org

The Organization Tab is used to define an Organization. Each Organization has a Key and Name and optionally a Description. When adding a new organization, you must re-login to be able to access the new organization. Please note that you will not be able to create new entities in this window if you have not default set for all mandatory values! • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

97/461

• IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • Upc: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar, Code 25, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128, UPC (A), UPC (E), EAN-13, EAN-8, ITF, ITF-14, ISBN, ISSN, JAN-13, JAN-8, POSTNET and FIM, MSI/Plessey, and Pharmacode) Custom code. Deprecated

13.5

AD OrgInfo

The Organization Info Tab is used to define an Organization’s address, DUNS number and Tax Identification number • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • DUNS: Used for EDI - For details see www.dnb.com/dunsno/list.htm • TaxID: The Tax ID field identifies the legal Identification number of this Entity. • PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • Logo: • Reference Order: Uses Order document number as inout number

98/461

13.6

AD Session

History of Online or Web Sessions • AD Session ID: Online or Web Session Information • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • WebSession: Web Session identifier • Remote Addr: The Remote Address indicates an alternative or external address. • Remote Host: Remote Host • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.

13.7

AD Preference

Defines preferences (default values) for a user. • AD Preference ID: Personal Preference, a default value that will be used by a user. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Attribute: Attribute name that will take the value. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order).

99/461

14

Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth

The Warehouse and Locators define each Warehouse, any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. The Shipper defines the different shipping providers used by an Organization. Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected.

14.1

M Warehouse

Warehouse defines each Warehouse that is used to store products. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • Separator: The Element Separator defines the delimiter printed between elements of the structure • IsShipper: This check indicates if the warehouse is a van that can receive and serve orders. • Shippercode: If warehouse is shipper type this code identifies the terminal in the van.

100/461

101/461 Figure 14: Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth

• FromDocumentNo: If warehouse is shipper type this field is the lowest range for the document numbers used by the terminal. • ToDocumentNo: If warehouse is shipper type this field is the highest range for the document numbers used by the terminal. • LocatorUnitsPerPallet: Custom code. Deprecated • Warehouse Size: Custom code. Deprecated

14.2

M Locator

The Locator defines any Locators for that Warehouse. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • PriorityNo: The Relative Priority indicates the location to pick from first if an product is stored in more than one location. (0 = highest priority) • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • X: The X dimension indicates the Aisle a product is located in. • Y: The Y dimension indicates the Bin a product is located in

102/461

• Z: The Z dimension indicates the Level a product is located in. • SizeMultiplier: Custom code. Deprecated • Invoicingtype: How to invoice a locator is being renting Custom code. Deprecated • M Locator Type ID: The ID identifies the unique type for the locator Custom code. Deprecated

14.3

M Warehouse Shipper

This table defines shipper path tracks. Each movil warehouse has a particular track. • M Warehouse Shipper ID: Shipper Warehouse • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records

14.4

M Freight

Freight Rates for Shipper • M Freight ID: Freight Rate for Shipper • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization.

103/461

• M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • To Country ID: The To Country indicates the receiving country on a document • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • To Region ID: The To Region indicates the receiving region on a document • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. • Freight Unit: It is the unit how the quantity is given. • Isprice: This field indicates if it is a fixed price or it is per unit. • Line Round: How units are rounded for each of the in-out lines. • Qtyfrom: Lowest quantity • Qtyto: Highest quantity • Total Round: How units are rounded for the whole in-out.

104/461

• Line Round: How units are rounded for each of the in-out lines.14. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Freight Unit: It is the unit how the quantity is given.6 M Shipper The Shippers table defines any entity who will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. C Order). • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients.5 M FreightCategory Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If you leave the search key empty. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 14.g. • Total Round: How units are rounded for the whole in-out. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. 105/461 . comment or help about the use of this item.

This can include Vendor. Customer. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 106/461 .• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Employee or Salesperson • TrackingURL: The variable @TrackingNo@ in the URL is replaced by the actual tracking number of the shipment. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

Sales Region defines the different regions where you do business. You cannot share data between Clients. • Greeting: The Greeting indicates what will print on letters sent to a Business Partner.1 C Greeting The Greeting table defines the way in which you will address business partners on documents. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact. Defines Tax Categories for bussines partners. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display 107/461 . This includes customers. 15.2 C Greeting Trl This table contains greeting translation to different languages. • IsFirstNameOnly: The First Name Only checkbox indicates that only the first name of this contact should print in greetings.15 Business partner Business Partner allows to define any party with whom you transact. • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. vendors and employees. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. These categories are used in order to choose which tax will be applied. Greeting defines a greeting that is then associated with a Business Partner or Business Partner Contact. 15. Business Partner Group allows to define the accounting parameters at a group level.

108/461 Figure 15: Business partner .

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If the Employee is also a Sales Representative then the check box should be selected. • Greeting: The Greeting indicates what will print on letters sent to a Business Partner. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.g. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Vendor defines a Business Partner that is a Vendor for this Organization. C Order). 109/461 . If the Vendor check box is selected the necessary fields will display.3 C BPartner The Business Partner table defines any entity with whom an organization transacts. Customer defines a Business Partner who is a customer of this organization. Customer. 15. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If the Customer check box is selected then the necessary fields will display.• C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. If you leave the search key empty. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Employee defines a Business Partner who is an Employee of this organization. The entity could be a customer or/and a vendor or/and an employee. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. This can include Vendor. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Employee or Salesperson • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. If it is selected.com/dunsno/list.dnb. • ReferenceNo: The reference number can be printed on orders and invoices to allow your business partner to faster identify your records.htm • URL: The URL defines an online address for this Business Partner. If it is selected. • IsCustomer: The Customer checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a customer. • IsOneTime: • IsProspect: The Prospect checkbox indicates an entity that is an active prospect or customer.• Name2: Additional Name • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsSalesRep: The Sales Rep checkbox indicates if this employee is also a sales representative.For details see www. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. If it is select additional fields will display which further define this customer. • IsVendor: The Vendor checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a Vendor. • IsEmployee: The Employee checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is an Employee. additional fields will display which further identify this employee. additional fields will display which further identify this vendor. • DUNS: Used for EDI . • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display 110/461 .

• NAICS: The NAICS/SIC identifies either of these codes that may be applicable to this Business Partner. • NumberEmployees: Indicates the number of employees for this Business Partner. • ShareOfCustomer: The Share indicates the percentage of this Business Partner’s volume of the products supplied. • ActualLifeTimeValue: The Actual Life Time Value is the recorded revenue to be generated by this Business Partner. • C InvoiceSchedule ID: The Invoice Schedule identifies the frequency used when generating invoices. • PotentialLifeTimeValue: The Potential Life Time Value is the anticipated revenue to be generated by this Business Partner. you need to set up a tax rate with a 0% rate and indicate that this is your tax exempt rate. • IsTaxExempt: If a business partner is exempt from tax. 111/461 . the exempt tax rate is used. • FirstSale: The First Sale Date identifies the date of the first sale to this Business Partner • AcqusitionCost: The Acquisition Cost identifies the cost associated with making this prospect a customer. so that you can track tax exempt transactions. • Rating: The Rating is used to differentiate the importance • SalesVolume: The Sales Volume indicates the total volume of sales for a Business Partner. For this.• TaxID: The Tax ID field identifies the legal Identification number of this Entity. This is required for tax reporting. • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. This field displays only for Prospects.

• SO CreditUsed: The Credit Used indicates the total amount of open or unpaid invoices for this Business Partner. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. • IsDiscountPrinted: The Discount Printed Checkbox indicates if the discount will be printed on the document. • C Dunning ID: The Dunning indicates the rules and method of dunning for past due payments. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. • SO Description: The Order Description identifies the standard description to use on orders for this Customer. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. margin and cost of items purchased or sold.• SO CreditLimit: The Credit Limit indicates the total amount allowed ’on account’. • PO PriceList ID: Identifies the price list used by a Vendor for products purchased by this organization. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • PaymentRulePO: The Payment Rule indicates the method of purchase payment. • PO DiscountSchema ID: 112/461 . If this is exceeded a warning message will be generated. • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction.

• C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. • DocumentCopies: The Document Copies indicates the number of copies of each document that will be generated. • SOCreditStatus: For Documentation only Not implemented yet • AD Forced Org ID: An organization is a unit of your client or legal entity . • FreightCostRule: The Freight Cost Rule indicates the method used when charging for freight.g.) • BPartner Parent ID: The parent (organization) of the Business Partner for reporting purposes.• PO PaymentTerm ID: The PO Payment Term indicates the payment term that will be used when this purchase order becomes an invoice. For example. Not implemented yet • Invoice PrintFormat ID: You need to define a Print Format to print the document. when a line is complete or as the products become available. Delivery Note. • InvoiceRule: The Invoice Rule defines how a Business Partner is invoiced and the frequency of invoicing. department. • SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. You can share data between organizations. will the order be picked up or shipped. etc. For example should the order be delivered when the entire order is complete. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • DeliveryRule: The Delivery Rule indicates when an order should be delivered. Invoice. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. 113/461 .examples are store. • DeliveryViaRule: The Delivery Via indicates how the products should be delivered.

-User defined 1 (User1) 15. • FixMonthDay2: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. use the value By ship location (000010000000000) • Fixmonthday: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.-Activity (C Activity ID) 13. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected.• M Wh Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators.-Shipment (M InOut ID) 4.-Campaign (C Campaign ID) 11.-Order organization (AD Org ID) 2. Deprecated • STORAGEPAYMENTRULE: Custom code. Deprecated • ShowPriceInOrder: When not checked prices are not shown (left blank) in the printed order document • Invoicegrouping: For scheduled invoicing.-Currency (C Currency ID) 10.-Payment term (C PaymentTerm ID) 9.-Project (C Project ID) 12. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected.-Transaction organization (AD OrgTrx ID) 14.-Sales representative (SalesRep ID) 7.-User defined 2 (User2) For example. if you want to create different invoices for each ship location for a customer. • Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. 3 different fix month days can be defined.-Order (C Order ID) 3. 3 different fix month days can be defined. The value is used as a binary code with 15 digits: 1. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected.-Ship location (C BPartner Location ID) 6. 114/461 . break into different invoices if the related values are different. Custom code.-Payment rule (PaymentRule) 8. 3 different fix month days can be defined.-Invoice location (BillTo ID) 5.

• PO Fixmonthday2: The Fix Month Day for Purchases indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. MSI/Plessey. UPC (A). JAN-13. • PO Bp Taxcategory ID: PO Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for procurement transactions. Deprecated • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar.• Ismanager: Custom code. Code 25. and Pharmacode) • Invoice Printformat: You need to define a Print Format to print the document. This field only displays if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. 3 different Fix Month Days can be defined. Deprecated • Isworker: Custom code. 115/461 . • Last Days: This field is used Copy Lines From in Order tab to specify the consumptions made in the last n days. ISBN. • SO Bankaccount ID: Default Customer Bankaccount • SO Bp Taxcategory ID: Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for sales transactions. EAN-8. ITF. 3 different Fix Month Days can be defined. Code 93. This field only displays if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. Code 39. Code 128. This field only displays if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. EAN-13. ITF-14. • PO Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day for Purchases indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. 3 different Fix Month Days can be defined. POSTNET and FIM. JAN-8. ISSN. Deprecated • Managers: Custom code. UPC (E). • PO Bankaccount ID: Default Vendor Bank Account • PO Fixmonthday: The Fix Month Day for Purchases indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.

• C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsBillTo: The Bill to Address checkbox indicates if this location is the Bill to Address for this Business Partner • IsShipTo: The Ship to Address checkbox indicates if this location is the address to use when shipping orders to this Business Partner. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. 116/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.4 C BPartner Location The Location defines the physical location of a business partner. A business partner may have multiple location records. You cannot share data between Clients. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location • ISDN: The ISDN identifies a ISDN or Modem line number. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.• C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category 15. • IsPayFrom: The Pay From Address checkbox indicates if this location is the address the Business Partner pays from. • IsRemitTo: The Remit to Address checkbox indicates if this location is the address to which we should send payments to this Business Partner.

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. UPC (E). • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. This can include Vendor.5 C SalesRegion The Sales Region defines the different regions where you do business. Employee or Salesperson • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. Code 93. ISSN. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. MSI/Plessey. ITF-14. • IsTaxLocation: This fieldindicates that this location is a fiscal address. Sales Regions can be used when generating reports or calculating commissions. JAN-8. EAN-13. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. C Order). Code 128.g. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.• C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. and Pharmacode) 15. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Code 39. JAN-13. ITF. POSTNET and FIM. the system automatically creates a numeric number. You cannot share data between Clients. EAN-8. ISBN. Fiscal addresses are shown in all documents. 117/461 . If you leave the search key empty. UPC (A). Customer. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Code 25.

Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values.7 C BP TaxCategory Defines Tax Categories for bussines partners. • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. 15. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region.6 C BP Group The Business Partner Group allows for the association of business partners for reporting and accounting defaults. 15. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.g. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.• IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. These categories are used in order to choose which tax will be applied. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If you leave the search key empty. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. the system automatically creates a numeric number. C Order). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. 118/461 .

It is used in routing checks and electronic transactions. Employee or Salesperson • C Bank ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. • IsACH: The ACH checkbox indicates if this Bank Account accepts ACH transactions. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • RoutingNo: The Bank Routing Number (ABA Number) identifies a legal Bank. This can include Vendor. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. You cannot share data between Clients. • C BP BankAccount ID: The Partner Bank Account identifies the bank account to be used for this Business Partner • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • BankAccountType: The Bank Account Type field indicates the type of account (savings.8 C BP BankAccount The Define Bank Account Tab defines the banking information for this business partner.• C BP TaxCategory ID: Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for procurement transactions. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. checking etc) this account is defined as. Customer. You cannot share data between Clients. • AccountNo: The Account Number indicates the Number assigned to this account 119/461 . This data is used for processing payments and remittances. 15.

• A Ident DL: The Driver’s License being used as identification. without blanks or spaces. • CreditCardVV: The Credit Card Verification indicates the verification code on the credit card (AMEX 4 digits on front. • A Ident SSN: The Social Security number being used as identification. • A Street: The Street Address of the Credit Card or Account holder.• CreditCardType: The Credit Card drop down list box is used for selecting the type of Credit Card presented for payment. MC. • R AvsZip: The Zip Verified indicates if the zip code has been verified by the Credit Card Company. • A City: The Account City indicates the City of the Credit Card or Account holder • A State: The State of the Credit Card or Account holder • A Zip: The Zip Code of the Credit Card or Account Holder. • CreditCardNumber: The Credit Card number indicates the number on the credit card. • A Name: The Name of the Credit Card or Account holder. • R AvsAddr: The Address Verified indicates if the address has been verified by the Credit Card Company. • CreditCardExpYY: The Expiry Year indicates the expiry year for this credit card. 120/461 .Visa 3 digits back) • CreditCardExpMM: The Expiry Month indicates the expiry month for this credit card. • A EMail: The EMail Address indicates the EMail address off the Credit Card or Account holder.

g. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.9 AD User The User Tab defines the log in for Users who have access to the system. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Bank Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. Passwords are required to identify authorized users. 15. • PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against.com). • Supervisor ID: The Supervisor indicates who will be used for forwarding and escalating issues for this user. 121/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. joe. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.smith@company.• A Country: Account Country Name • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. The User identifies a unique user in the system. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

• Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location • LastContact: The Last Contact indicates the date that this Business Partner Contact was last contacted. • EmailUser: The user name in the mail system is usually the string before the @ of your email address. • Comments: The Comments field allows for free form entry of additional information. Customer. • EmailUserPW: Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails.• PA GoalPrivate ID: The Personal Goals displays goals that a user will set for themselves. • LastResult: The Last Result identifies the result of the last contact made. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. Employee or Salesperson • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. • Title: The Title indicates the name that an entity is referred to as. This can include Vendor. • Birthday: Birthday or Anniversary day 122/461 .

and inter-organization transactions. Not implemented yet • Firstname: First Name of the contact • Lastname: Last name of the contact • UserName: Name that identifies the user in the System 15. 123/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. that this record was entered or created via Self-Service or that the user can change it via the Self-Service functionality. with centralized services. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. The flag indicates. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment.11 R ContactInterest Interest Area can be used for Marketing Campaigns The subscription is used to follow up the contacts which are subscribed to an specific area of interest and also add new subscribers. 15.• AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsSelfService: Self-Service allows users to enter data or update their data. • R InterestArea ID: Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.10 R InterestArea Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact.

Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact 124/461 . • SubscribeDate: Date the contact subscribe the interest area • OptOutDate: If the field has a date.• R InterestArea ID: Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact. the customer opted out (unsubscribed) and cannot receive mails for the Interest Area • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 125/461 . • NetDays: Indicates the number of days after invoice date that payment is due. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AfterDelivery: The After Delivery checkbox indicates that payment is due after delivery as opposed to after invoicing. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 16. • IsDueFixed: The Fixed Due Date checkbox indicates if invoices using this payment term will be due on a fixed day of the month. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. This field displays only if the send dunning letters checkbox has been selected. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product.1 C PaymentTerm The Payment Term defines the different payments terms that you offer to your Business Partners when paying invoices and also those terms which your Vendors offer you for payment of your invoices. On the standard invoice. the Name and the Document Note • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.16 Payment term Payment Terms defines the different payment terms that you offer your customers and that are offered to you by your vendors. • GraceDays: The Grace Days indicates the number of days after the due date to send the first dunning letter.

126/461 Figure 16: Payment term .

The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • IsNextBusinessDay: The Next Business Day checkbox indicates that payment is due on the next business day after invoice or delivery. 3 different fix month days can be defined. • NetDay: When defined. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. a 1 the following month. A 0 indicates the same month. overwrites the number of net days with the relative number of days to the the day defined. If you leave the search key empty. • DiscountDays2: The Discount Days indicates the number of days that payment must be received in to be eligible for the stated discount. • FixMonthDay: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • IsValid: The element passed the validation check 127/461 . C Order). • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. This field only displays when the fixed due date checkbox has been selected. • Discount2: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. the system automatically creates a numeric number.g. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. This field will only display if the fixed due date checkbox is selected.• FixMonthCutoff: The Fix Month Cutoff indicates the last day invoices can have to be included in the current due date. • FixMonthOffset: The Fixed Month Offset indicates the number of months from the current month to indicate an invoice is due. • DiscountDays: The Discount Days indicates the number of days that payment must be received in to be eligible for the stated discount.

• Percentage: Percentage of an amount (up to 100) • Onremainder: • Excludetax: • Paymentrule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. 16. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. 3 different fix month days can be defined. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. 3 different fix month days can be defined. You cannot share data between Clients. • Netdays: Indicates the number of days after invoice date that payment is due. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. • C Paymentterm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.• FixMonthDay2: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. 128/461 . • Isduefixed: The Fixed Due Date checkbox indicates if invoices using this payment term will be due on a fixed day of the month.2 C Paymenttermline Line in a Pyament Term • C Paymenttermline ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected.

overwrites the number of net days with the relative number of days to the the day defined. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. 16. • FixMonthDay2: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. • Fixmonthday: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. 3 different fix month days can be defined. 129/461 . 3 different fix month days can be defined. • Isnextbusinessday: The Next Business Day checkbox indicates that payment is due on the next business day after invoice or delivery. This field only displays when the fixed due date checkbox has been selected. A 0 indicates the same month. • Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. You cannot share data between Clients. This field will only display if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. a 1 the following month. 3 different fix month days can be defined. • Fixmonthoffset: The Fixed Month Offset indicates the number of months from the current month to indicate an invoice is due.• Fixmonthcutoff: The Fix Month Cutoff indicates the last day invoices can have to be included in the current due date.3 C PaymentTerm Trl The translation defines the payment terms translations for different languages • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. • Netday: When defined.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 130/461 .

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.17 Product Product Category defines different groups of products. JAN-8. Maintain your Resources. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Update Name. MSI/Plessey. 17. etc. Code 128. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Vendor Details displays and maintains all products for a selected Vendor. If you leave the search key empty. Product defines all products used by an organization. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 131/461 . EAN-13. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. UPC (E). The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The Location is the default location when receiving the stored products. Unit of Measure. Code 93. EAN-8. ISSN. in the Resource and don’t change it in the product. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. comment or help about the use of this item. Code 39. used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. These products include those sold to customers.1 M Product Defines each product and identifies it for use in price lists and orders. UPC (A).g. ITF-14. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Code 25. JAN-13. ITF. C Order). The product for the resource is automatically created and synchronized. ISBN. You cannot share data between Clients. POSTNET and FIM.

132/461 Figure 17: Product .

• IsVerified: The Verified check box indicates if the configuration of this product has been verified. • IsBOM: The Bill of Materials check box indicates if this product consists of a bill of materials. • IsPickListPrintDetails: The Print Details on Pick List indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Pick List as opposed to this product. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • IsInvoicePrintDetails: The Print Details on Invoice indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Invoice as opposed to this product. • IsPurchased: The Purchased check box indicates if this product is purchased by this organization. This is used for products that consist of a bill of materials • C RevenueRecognition ID: The Revenue Recognition indicates how revenue will be recognized for this product 133/461 . It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region.and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. • IsSold: The Sold check box indicates if this product is sold by this organization. • IsStocked: The Stocked check box indicates if this product is stocked by this Organization. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user.

• DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. For example. Product categories are used for pricing. • Volume: The Volume indicates the volume of the product in the Volume UOM of the Client • Weight: The Weight indicates the weight of the product in the Weight UOM of the Client • ShelfWidth: The Shelf Width indicates the width dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfHeight: The Shelf Height indicates the height dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfDepth: The Shelf Depth indicates the depth dimension required on a shelf for a product • UnitsPerPallet: The Units per Pallet indicates the number of units of this product which fit on a pallet. • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax.• M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • S Resource ID: The ID identifies a unique resource Not implemented yet • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. • Classification: The Classification can be used to optionally group products. 134/461 .

• R MailText ID: The Mail Template indicates the mail template for return messages. 135/461 . otherwise the guarantee date is calculated by adding the days to the delivery date. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • DownloadURL: Semicolon separated list of URLs to be downloaded or distributed • M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • VersionNo: Version Number Not implemented yet • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product.• S ExpenseType ID: Expense report type • ProductType: The type of product also determines accounting consequences. jpeg or png. • DescriptionURL: URL for the description • GuaranteeDays: If the value is 0. The image is not stored in the database. there is no limit to the availability or guarantee. Customer. • ImageURL: URL of image. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. The image can be a gif. Employee or Salesperson • Ispriceprinted: It allows you to print or not the price of a product in a document so you can summary many products in just one. but retrieved at runtime. This can include Vendor. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking.

• Name2: Additional Name • Costtype: Different types of cost • Coststd: The value of the standard cost • Stock Min: Minimum stock of a product Not implemented yet • Enforce Attribute: For differing the stock of a product by the attribute Not implemented yet • Bundle Uom: Custom code. You cannot share data between Clients.2 M Product Category The Product Category defines unique groupings of products. Product categories are used for pricing. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Deprecated • Greenpoint Uom: Custom code. Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. Product categories can be used in building price lists. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • MA Producttype ID: • Production: A product that is used for production plans 17. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. Deprecated • Upc2: Custom code. 136/461 .

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Substitute ID: The Substitute identifies the product to be used as a substitute for this product. You cannot share data between Clients. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. 17. assets are created when delivering the asset.• Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty.3 M Substitute The Substitute Tab defines products which may be used as a replacement for the selected product. 137/461 . • PlannedMargin: The Planned Margin Percentage indicates the anticipated margin percentage for this project or project line • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. the system automatically creates a numeric number. C Order). • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.g. If an asset group is selected in the product category. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

• BOMType: Type of Bill of Materials 17.17.4 M Product BOM The Bill of Materials defines those products that are generated from other products. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. A Bill of Material (BOM) is one or more Products or BOMs.The available quantity of a no • M Product BOM ID: The Bill of Materials defines each product that are generated from other products. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. Available Quantity: . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 M Product Customer Asigns products to customers • M Product Customer ID: Product assignation to customer 138/461 . • BOMQty: The BOM Quantity indicates the quantity of the product in its Unit of Measure (multiplication) • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M ProductBOM ID: The BOM Product identifies an element that is part of this Bill of Materials.Stored BOMs have to be created via Production . You cannot share data between Clients.

UPC (E). • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. You cannot share data between Clients. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. ITF-14. • M Product Org ID: Details for a product in different organizations. You cannot share data between Clients. • MRP Planningmethod ID: Identifies a method for filtering the input for planning processes. EAN-13. Code 93.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 139/461 . Employee or Salesperson 17. and Pharmacode) • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. Code 39. MSI/Plessey. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. ISBN. POSTNET and FIM. This can include Vendor. ISSN. ITF. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. JAN-13. Code 25. EAN-8. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Customer. UPC (A). • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.6 M Product Org Defines details for a product in different organizations. Code 128. JAN-8.

UPC. This can include Vendor. Employee or Salesperson • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Qtystd: Quantity Standard • Qtymax: • Capacity: Capacity per day • Delaymin: Minimun number of days to complete the transaction 17. You cannot share data between Clients.• Stockmin: Minimun Stock • Qtytype: Quantity Type • Qtymin: Minumun Quantity. minimum order quantity) for each product. The Product Details allows you to display and maintain all products for a selected Vendor.7 M Product PO The Purchasing defines the pricing and rules ( pack quantity. • IsCurrentVendor: The Current Vendor indicates if prices are used and Product is reordered from this vendor • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 140/461 . • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Customer.

UPC (A). JAN-8. • PriceLastPO: The Last PO Price indicates the last price paid (per the purchase order) for this product. • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product • Order Min: The Minimum Order Quantity indicates the smallest quantity of this product which can be ordered. • PricePO: The PO Price indicates the price for a product per the purchase order. EAN-13. This allows you to enter future prices for products which will become effective when appropriate. POSTNET and FIM. • Order Pack: The Order Pack Quantity indicates the number of units in each pack of this product. Code 25. • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued.• PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. • PriceLastInv: The Last Invoice Price indicates the last price paid (per the invoice) for this product. Code 93. and Pharmacode) • VendorCategory: The Vendor Category identifies the category used by the vendor for this product. 141/461 . Code 39. UPC (E). JAN-13. • PriceEffective: The Price Effective indicates the date this price is for. MSI/Plessey. Code 128. ITF-14. ISBN. • VendorProductNo: The Vendor Product Number identifies the number used by the vendor for this product. ISSN. EAN-8. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. ITF.

• DeliveryTime Actual: The Actual Delivery Time indicates the number of days elapsed between placing an order and the delivery of the order • QualityRating: The Quality Rating indicates how a vendor is rated (higher number = higher quality) • RoyaltyAmt: Not implemented yet • Manufacturer: Manufacturer • Qtystd: Quantity Standard • Qtytype: Quantity Type • Capacity: Capacity per day 17. 142/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • DeliveryTime Promised: The Promised Delivery Time indicates the number of days between the order date and the date that delivery was promised.8 M Replenish The Replenishment defines the type of replenishment quantities. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. This is used for automated ordering.• CostPerOrder: The Cost Per Order indicates the fixed charge levied when an order for this product is placed. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• M Product Template ID: Product template • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Level Min: Indicates the minimum quantity of this product to be stocked in inventory.9 M Product Template The product template is used to configure standard orders for a business partner. For instance diskettes are stocked and accounted in units while are bought in boxes of 10. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor. ordered when the quantity is below the minimum quantity or ordered when it is below the maximum quantity. • Level Max: Indicates the maximum quantity of this product to be stocked in inventory. 17. Customer. Using templates is a good way to avoid having to repeat the entry of each line of the order when there are few changes. 143/461 . • Type Template: Specifies the template type for the product. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. Can be define as a template for orders. This does not necessarily need to be the unit which is used for the invoice. Employee or Salesperson • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.10 M Product UOM Users can define the unit of the order. 17.• ReplenishType: The Replenish Type indicates if this product will be manually reordered. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product.

• Cumqty: Cumulate quantity. 17. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) • Ismanual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. 144/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M Inoutline ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. You cannot share data between Clients. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.11 M Costing Stores the average costs for purchases and productions • M Costing ID: Average costs for purchases and productions • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• M Productionline ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • Isproduction: Sets the record id for production. 145/461 . • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. 17. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.12 M Product Trl The translation defines the product name for different languages • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• Costtype: Different types of cost • Ispermanent: • Cost: Cost amount. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

• StdPrecision: The Standard Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to for accounting transactions and documents. It also defines the conversion between units of measure. hour.g. day. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • CostingPrecision: The Costing Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to when performing costing calculations.1 C UOM Unit of Measure defines a non monetary Unit of Measure. etc. If you order 8 rolls. working day. The system provides some automatic conversions between units of measures (e. • Breakdown: Indicates if the line order in that unit of mesaure has to be breaken down on the shipment document. the shipment document must show eight lines of 1 roll 146/461 .g. E.) if they are not explicitly defined here. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.18 Unit of Measure Unit of Measure is used to define non monetary units of measure. You cannot share data between Clients. 18. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • X12DE355: The Unit of Measure Code indicates the EDI X12 Code Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) • UOMSymbol: The Symbol identifies the Symbol to be displayed and printed for a Unit of Measure • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. minute.

147/461 Figure 18: Unit of Measure .

) if they are not explicitly defined here.3 C UOM Trl Unit of Measure translations to different languages • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. etc.Conversions need to be dir • C UOM Conversion ID: The UOM Conversion identifies a unique to and from Unit of Measure. 18.2 C UOM Conversion The Conversion defines the rates for converting a Unit of Measure. If you enter a Divide Rate. If the Multiply Rate is entered. day. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. minute.g. • DivideRate: To convert Source number to Target number.18. conversion rate and conversion date range. You cannot share data between Clients. the Source is multiplied by the multiply rate. You cannot share data between Clients. then the Divide Rate will be automatically calculated. the Source is divided by the divide rate. • UOMSymbol: The Symbol identifies the Symbol to be displayed and printed for a Unit of Measure 148/461 . the Multiply Rate will be automatically calculated. hour. working day. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C UOM To ID: The UOM To indicates the destination UOM for a UOM Conversion pair. The system provides some automatic conversions between units of measures (e. • MultiplyRate: To convert Source number to Target number.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 149/461 .

all products have the same value.g. Size.g. 19. Size for T-Shirts: S. Size. • IsInstanceAttribute: If selected.L). Product Attribute like Color. You cannot share data between Clients. If not selected. • M AttributeSearch ID: Attributes are specific to a Product Attribute Set (e. If you have multiple attributes and want to search under a common sttribute.1 M Attribute Product Attribute like Color. you can select it by choosing one of the valid values. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database. Size • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsList: If the attribute has a predefined list of values. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking.M. This eases the maintenance of the individual product attribute. color=green).like the individual Serial or Lot Numbers or Guarantee Date of a product instance. If it is an Instance Attribute.S.19 Attribute Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. etc. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. etc. Otherwise you can enter the attribute value manually. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.M. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.XS).L. Example: have one Size search attribute combining the values of all different sizes (Size for Dress Shirt XL. • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color. the individual instance of the product has this attribute . The Attribute Search allows you to have all values available for selection. you define a search sttribute. all instances of the product share the attribute (e. 150/461 .

151/461 Figure 19: Attribute .

you can define Lot Numbers • M LotCtl ID: Definition to create Lot numbers for Products • IsGuaranteeDate: For individual products. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. large. you can define a guarantee or expiry date • GuaranteeDays: If the value is 0. You cannot share data between Clients.19. • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. . there is no limit to the availability or guarantee.) • M AttributeValue ID: Individual value of a product attribute (e.. green.g. 19. • IsSerNo: For individual products. . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. large.. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.g. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking.2 M AttributeSet Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. • IsLockable: This check indicates that the product is locked in the warehouse and it cannot be taken out of it. green.) 152/461 . otherwise the guarantee date is calculated by adding the days to the delivery date. you can define Serial Numbers • M SerNoCtl ID: Definition to create Serial numbers for Products • IsLot: For individual products.3 M AttributeValue Individual value of a product attribute (e. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

5 M AttributeSetInstance Values for a individual instance of attributes • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes 153/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. You cannot share data between Clients. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 19. • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color. 19.g. Size • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Size • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the system automatically creates a numeric number. You cannot share data between Clients. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order). If you leave the search key empty.4 M AttributeUse Attributes and Attribute Values used for the product • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.

C Order).g. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. • GuaranteeDate: Date when the normal guarantee or availability expires • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. warranted product. • M AttributeValue ID: Individual value of a product attribute (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number. large.) • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.. Size • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.g. • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product.6 M AttributeInstance Each of the values that an attribute has been set to. . • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. If you leave the search key empty.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. green. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. 154/461 . • M Lot ID: The individual Lot of a Product 19.

This is also known as the gross price. • IsSOPriceList: The Sales Price List check box indicates if this price list is used for sales transactions. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 155/461 . Different price adjustments can be configured for business partners.20 Pricing Trade discount schema calculates the trade discount percentage Price List generates product price lists for your Business Partners. products. partners groups and product categories.1 M PriceList Price lists determine currency of the document as well as tax treatment. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. • BasePriceList ID: The Base Price List identifies the default price list to be used if a product is not found on the selected price list Not implemented yet • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax. Price lists determine currency and tax treatment. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Price list versions allow to maintain parallel lists for different date ranges. 20. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

156/461 Figure 20: Pricing .

• M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price. 20. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.The other alternative is to copy them from existing pricelists and the re-calculate them. You cannot share data between Clients.You can also re-calculate the pricelist by referencin • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ProcCreate: • M Pricelist Version Base ID: The Base Price List identifies the Base Pricelist used for calculating prices (the source) • M Pricelist Version Generate: 157/461 .2 M PriceList Version Price lists are automatically created based on Product Purchasing Information and the Vendor Category Discount. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. Invoices are not checked.• EnforcePriceLimit: The Enforce Price Limit check box indicates that prices cannot be below the limit price in Orders. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing.

Standard and Limit prices for each price list a product is contained in.4 M DiscountSchema Trade discount schema calculates the trade discount percentage • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 20. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for.3 M ProductPrice The Pricing displays the List. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price. The Pricing Tab displays the List. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Standard and Limit prices for each price list a product is contained in.20. 158/461 . The Price List displays the prices for a product based on the selected price list. You cannot share data between Clients. • PriceStd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list • PriceLimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency.

the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price.• ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range Not implemented yet • DiscountType: Type of procedure used to calculate the trade discount percentage Not implemented yet • Script: Use Java language constructs to define the result of the calculation Not implemented yet • FlatDiscount: Not implemented yet • IsQuantityBased: The calculation of the trade discount level is based on the quantity of the order and not the value amount of the order Not implemented yet • CumulativeLevel: Not implemented yet • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. Product categories are used for pricing.The parameters listed here allow to copy and calculate pricelists.5 M DiscountSchemaLine Pricelists are created based on Product Purchase and Category Discounts. • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. 20.¡BR¿The calculation:¡UL¿¡LI¿Copy and convert price from referenced price list¡LI¿result plus Surcharge Amount¡L • M DiscountSchemaLine ID: For the Pricelist Discount Type. you enter how the list. standard and limit price is calculated. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. 159/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.

• List Discount: The List Price Discount Percentage indicates the percentage discount which will be subtracted from the base price. • List AddAmt: The List Price Surcharge Amount indicates the amount to be added to the price prior to multiplication.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. If this field contains 0. • List MaxAmt: The List Price Max Margin indicates the maximum margin for a product. This can include Vendor. • ConversionDate: The Conversion Date identifies the date used for currency conversion.00 then it is ignored. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original list price from the newly calculated price. If this field contains 0. This allows you to enter multiple rates for the same currency pair. Employee or Salesperson • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Customer. 160/461 . The conversion rate chosen must include this date in it’s date range • List Base: The List Price Base indicates the price to use as the basis for the calculation of a new price list. A negative amount indicates the percentage which will be added to the base price.00 then it is ignored. one rate may be used for Spot conversions and a different rate for Revaluations. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original list price from the newly calculated price. • List Fixed: Fixes List Price (not calculated) • Std Base: The Standard Price Base indicates the price to use as the basis for the calculation of a new price standard. For example. • List MinAmt: The List Price Min Margin indicates the minimum margin for a product. • ConversionRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of conversion rate. • List Rounding: The List Price Rounding indicates how the final list price will be rounded.

• Limit MinAmt: Indicates the minimum margin for a product. If this field contains 0. 161/461 . The margin is calculated by subtracting the original limit price from the newly calculated price. • Std MinAmt: The Standard Price Min Margin indicates the minimum margin for a product.00 then it is ignored. • Limit MaxAmt: Indicates the maximum margin for a product.00 then it is ignored. If this field contains 0. • Limit Discount: Indicates the discount in percent to be subtracted from base. • Limit AddAmt: Indicates the amount to be added to the Limit price prior to multiplication. • Std Fixed: Fixed Standard Price (not calculated) • Limit Base: Identifies the price to be used as the base for calculating a new price list. • Std Rounding: The Standard Price Rounding indicates how the final Standard price will be rounded.• Std AddAmt: The Standard Price Surcharge Amount indicates the amount to be added to the price prior to multiplication.00 then it is ignored. • Std Discount: The Standard Price Discount Percentage indicates the percentage discount which will be subtracted from the base price. if negative it will be added to base price • Limit Rounding: A drop down list box which indicates the rounding (if any) will apply to the final prices in this price list. A negative amount indicates the percentage which will be added to the base price. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original limit price from the newly calculated price. If this field contains 0. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original Standard price from the newly calculated price. • Std MaxAmt: The Standard Price Max Margin indicates the maximum margin for a product.00 then it is ignored. If this field contains 0. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original Standard price from the newly calculated price.

• Priority: The Priority indicates the importance of this request. products. The offer can be percentual. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) • BPartner Selection: Business Partner Selection Mode is the way Business Partners will be selected. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• Limit Fixed: Fixed Limit Price (not calculated) 20.6 M Offer The Price Adjustments has a vigence period and are applicated for the configurated business partners. product categorys and partners groups. • Addamt: Fixed discount amount • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • Fixed: Fixed price for the price adjustment • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • BP Group Selection: Defines the way Business Partner Groups will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones) • Product Selection: Defines the way Products will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones) 162/461 . fixed or set.

• Prod Cat Selection: Defines the way Product Categories will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones) • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Qty From: Quantity From is the minimun amount that the offer will be applied from. • Qty To: Quantity to is the maximun amount to apply the offer. • Pricelist Selection: Defines the way Price Lists will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones)

20.7

M Offer PriceList

Used to select Price Lists for a price adjustment. • M Offer Pricelist ID: Price List selected into a Price Adjustment. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • M Pricelist ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing, margin and cost of items purchased or sold.

20.8

M Offer BPartner

Used to select the business partners related to the Price Adjustment. • M Offer Bpartner ID: Selected Business Partner in a Price Adjustment • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment

163/461

• C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson

20.9

M Offer BP Group

Used to select the groups of business partners related to the price adjustment. • M Offer Bp Group ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners.

20.10

M Offer Prod Cat

Used to select the different categories of products related to the Price Adjustments. • M Offer Prod Cat ID: Product Category selected in a Price Adjustment • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. Product categories are used for pricing.

20.11

M Offer Product

Used to select the different products related to the Price Adjustment. • M Offer Product ID: Product selected in a Price Adjustment.

164/461

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

20.12

C Discount

Defines applicable discounts to the defined prices. • C Discount ID: Discount applicable to prices. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

20.13

C BPartner Discount

Defines the Business Partners the discount can be applied to. • C Bpartner Discount ID: A Business Partner who can be applied the discount to. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson

165/461

• C Discount ID: Discount applicable to prices. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Cascade: Indicates if it is applied in an accumulative way or if it is applied to the base amount. • Iscustomer: The Customer checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a customer. If it is select additional fields will display which further define this customer. • Isvendor: The Vendor checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a Vendor. If it is selected, additional fields will display which further identify this vendor.

166/461

21

Tax

Tax Category is used to enter and maintain Tax Categories. Each product is associated with a tax category which facilitates reacting changing tax rates. Tax Rate defines the different taxes used for each tax category.

21.1

C TaxCategory

The Tax Category is used to define and maintain Tax Categories. Each Product is associated with a Tax Category. This facilitates adapting to changes in taxation. • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example, Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • CommodityCode: The Commodity Code indicates a code that is used in tax calculations • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.

21.2

C TaxCategory Trl

Translation for Tax Categories • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example, Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

167/461

168/461 Figure 21: Tax

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.

21.3

C Tax

The Tax Rate Window defines the different taxes used for each tax category. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • TaxIndicator: The Tax Indicator identifies the short name that will print on documents referencing this tax. • IsDocumentLevel: If the tax is calculated on document level, all lines with that tax rate are added before calculating the total tax for the document.Otherwise the tax is calculated per line and then added.Due to rounding, the tax amount can differ. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • RequiresTaxCertificate: The Requires Tax Certificate indicates that a tax certificate is required for a Business Partner to be tax exempt.

169/461

• Rate: The Rate indicates the percentage to be multiplied by the source to arrive at the tax or exchange amount. • Parent Tax ID: The Parent Tax indicates a tax that is a reference for multiple taxes. This allows you to charge multiple taxes on a document by entering the Parent Tax • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • To Country ID: The To Country indicates the receiving country on a document • To Region ID: The To Region indicates the receiving region on a document • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example, Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • IsTaxExempt: If a business partner is exempt from tax, the exempt tax rate is used. For this, you need to set up a tax rate with a 0% rate and indicate that this is your tax exempt rate. This is required for tax reporting, so that you can track tax exempt transactions. • SOPOType: Sales Tax: charged when selling - examples: Sales Tax, Output VAT (payable)Purchase Tax: tax charged when purchasing - examples: Use Tax, Input VAT (receivable) • Isprinttax: Custom code. Deprecated • C Bp Taxcategory ID: Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for procurement transactions. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

170/461

• Cascade: Indicates if it is applied in an accumulative way or if it is applied to the base amount.

21.4

C Tax Trl

Translations for taxes. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • TaxIndicator: The Tax Indicator identifies the short name that will print on documents referencing this tax.

21.5

C Tax Zone

Defines the zones where the tax is applicable. • C Tax Zone ID: The tax zone indicates the zone from and the zone to the tax applies. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line.

171/461

• TO Country ID: The To Country indicates the receiving country on a document • TO Region ID: The To Region indicates the receiving region on a document 172/461 . • From Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document.• From Country ID: The Country defines a Country.

22 Currency Currency defines any currency which will be used in documents or reporting. 173/461 .1 C Currency The Currency defines any currency you will transact with or report in. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsEMUMember: The Emu Member checkbox is used to indicate if this currency is a member of the European Economic Union. • IsEuro: The Euro Currency checkbox is used to indicate if this currency is the Euro Currency.http://www.htm • CurSymbol: The Currency Symbol defines the symbol that will print when this currency is used. or will enter the Economic Monetary Union. • CostingPrecision: The Costing Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to when performing costing calculations. • ISO Code: For details . • EMUEntryDate: The EMU Entry Date defines the date that this currency entered. • StdPrecision: The Standard Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to for accounting transactions and documents.unece. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Conversion Rates is used to define the conversion rates that will be used when converting document amounts from one currency to another 22. You cannot share data between Clients.org/trade/rec/rec09en.

174/461 Figure 22: Currency .

• PricePrecision: Defines the number of decimal positions that the prices are displayed with. 22.• EMURate: The EMU Rate defines the official rate to be used when converting from this currency to the Euro. They can also be effective for a defined range of dates. 175/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • CurSymbol: The Currency Symbol defines the symbol that will print when this currency is used.3 C Conversion Rate The Conversion Rate defines the rates to use when converting a source currency to an accounting or reporting currency. Conversion rates can be defined for multiple rate types.2 C Currency Trl Translations for currencies • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 22. The Conversion Rates tab is used to define conversion rates to be used when converting document amounts from one currency to another. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • C Conversion Rate ID: The Conversion Rate defines the rate (multiply or divide) to use when converting a source currency to an accounting currency.

If you enter a Divide Rate. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C Currency ID To: The Currency To defines the target currency for this conversion rate. the Multiply Rate will be automatically calculated. the Source is divided by the divide rate. If the Multiply Rate is entered. then the Divide Rate will be automatically calculated. the Source is multiplied by the multiply rate. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range • ConversionRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of conversion rate.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. one rate may be used for Spot conversions and a different rate for Revaluations. • MultiplyRate: To convert Source number to Target number. For example. This allows you to enter multiple rates for the same currency pair. • DivideRate: To convert Source number to Target number. 176/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.

• C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • DocBaseType: The Document Base Type identifies the base or starting point for a document. ¡b¿Invoice¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Receipt¡/b¿ must be generated via other processes. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The selection made here will determine which documents will be generated when an order is processed and which documents must be generated manually or in batches.1 C DocType The Document Definition Tab defines the processing parameters and controls for the document. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.23 Document type Document Type defines any document to be used in the system. 23. ¡BR¿The ¡b¿Delivery Note¡/b¿. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • DocSubTypeSO: The SO Sub Type indicates the type of sales order this document refers to. Multiple document types may share a single document base type. This field only appears when the Document Base Type is Sales Order. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence.¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿Credit Order¡/b¿ will generate 177/461 . Each document type provides the basis for processing of each document and controls the printed name and document sequence used. The max length is 2000 characters. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿Standard Order¡/b¿ will generate just the ¡b¿Order¡/b¿ document when the order is processed. ¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿Warehouse Order¡/b¿ will generate the ¡b¿Order¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Delivery Note¡/b¿. ¡BR¿The following outlines this process. ¡BR¿ The ¡b¿Invoice¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Receipt¡/b¿ must be generated via other processes.

178/461 Figure 23: Document type .

• IsBatched: • IsBatchControlEnforced: 179/461 .the ¡b¿Order¡/b¿. This field is displayed only if the Approved checkbox has been selected • IsDocNoControlled: The Document Number Controlled checkbox indicates if this document type will have a sequence number. • C Approval ID: The Approval indicates the type of approval. This field will display only when the base document type is Sales Order and the Pro Forma Invoice checkbox is selected • C DocTypeShipment ID: The Document Type for Shipments indicates the document type that will be used when a shipment is generated from this sales document. This field will display only when the base document type is Sales Order. ¡BR¿ The ¡b¿Reciept¡/b¿ must be generated via other processes. • C DocTypeProforma ID: The Document Type for Invoice indicates the document type that will be used when an invoice is generated from this sales document. • CreatePicklist: • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. • DocNoSequence ID: The Document Sequence indicates the sequencing rule to use for this document type.¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿POS¡/b¿ (Point of Sale) will generate all document • HasProforma: The Pro Forma Invoice checkbox indicates if pro forma invoices can be generated from this sales document. This field will display only when the base document type is Sales Order. • C DocTypeInvoice ID: The Document Type for Invoice indicates the document type that will be used when an invoice is generated from this sales document. ¡b¿Delivery Note¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Invoice¡/b¿. A pro forma invoice indicates the amount that will be due should an order be shipped.

• C Doctype Reversed ID: 180/461 . • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • AD PrintFormat ID: The print format determines how data is rendered for print. This is used to calculate the document number by document type. • DocumentCopies: The Document Copies indicates the number of copies of each document that will be generated. • HasCharges: The Charges checkbox indicates that charges can be added to this document. handling or bank charges. If Isorgfiltered=’Y’ Ismaxtable must be equal to ’Y’ This will calculate the correct document number of the organization.• IsBatchDocNoControlled: • BatchNoSequence ID: • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. user defined method of grouping journal lines. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. • Orgfiltered: Filters by organization. A different document number for each organization. Charges can include items like shipping. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. • Ismaxtable: This field is associated with Isorgfiltered field. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • IsTransferred: The transferred checkbox indicates if the transactions associated with this document should be transferred to the General Ledger.

• C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 181/461 .2 C DocType Trl The Translation Tab defines a Document Type in an alternate language. You cannot share data between Clients. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence. The max length is 2000 characters.23. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.

• Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.1 C Activity Defines tasks that are preformed and in Activity Based Costing. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Marketing Channel defines the different channels used in Marketing Campaigns 24. If you leave the search key empty.g. It also gives a running balance of the invoice amounts which referred to this campaign. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Campaign and Channel Activity Based Costing defines the different activities for which you want to capture costs. Marketing Campaign defines the start and end date for a campaign.24 Activity. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. comment or help about the use of this item. 182/461 . where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order).

183/461 Figure 24: Activity. Campaign and Channel .

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. These include a start and end date as well as the amount of any invoices that have been processed which reference this campaign.24. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C Channel ID: The Sales Channel identifies a channel (or method) of sales generation. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Please note that you will not be able to create new entities in this window if you have not default set for all mandatory values! • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. If you leave the search key empty.g. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Costs: The Costs indicates the cost of a campaign in an Organizations accounting currency. 184/461 . • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. C Order).2 C Campaign The Marketing Campaign defines the parameters for a Campaign. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Channel ID: The Sales Channel identifies a channel (or method) of sales generation. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. 185/461 .24.3 C Channel The Marketing Channel Tab defines the different methods or processes through which customers are obtained.

• Requiresdescription: If description is required • Isdelivery: If it has to be delivered 186/461 . Incoterms also influence Customs valuation basis of imported merchandise. When commercial traders enter into a contract for the purchase and sale of goods they are free to negotiate specific terms of their contract.1 C Incoterms EXW Ex-works. FCA Free carrier (Franco Transportista) FAS (Free alongside ship) FOB (Free on Board) CFR (Cost & Freight) CIF (Cost. Purchase Order defines a purchase order for an organization. quantity. ex-mill. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. This data is completed with defauly values in each type of order. These terms include the price. who is responsible for loading & unloading of goods. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. When a Purchase Order has been entered you can generate a Shipment Document or Invoice from this Purchase Order Simple Sales Order is used to trigger orders with minimal data. 25. The Incoterm selected by the parties to the transaction will determine which party pays the cost of each segment of transport. and characteristics of the goods. and who bears the risk of loss at any given point during a given international shipment. You cannot share data between Clients. Every international contract will also contain what is referred to as an Incoterm (international commercial term).25 Order Sale Order allows you to enter and modify Sales Orders. ex-factory. ex-warehouse. Insurance & Freight) CPT (Carriage paid to) CIP (Carriage and Insurance Paid to) • C Incoterms ID: The ID identifies a unique Incoterm • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

187/461 Figure 25: Order .

use the Document Action field • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field. C Order). the system will generate a document number for you.g. If the document is not saved. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time.g. The conversion is then reflected in the current type. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type.2 C Order Table where there are all the orders. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If you want to change the document status. 188/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. This processing is initiated by selecting the appropriate Document Action. from Offer to Order or Invoice).If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. If you leave the field empty. The purchase orders and the sales orders. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • C DocTypeTarget ID: You can convert document types (e. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. the field is empty if you create a new document. The options are listed in a popup • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.25.

• DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. This can include Vendor.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DatePromised: The Date Promised indicates the date. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. that an Order was promised for. • IsTransferred: The transferred checkbox indicates if the transactions associated with this document should be transferred to the General Ledger. • DatePrinted: Indicates the Date that a document was printed. if any. • IsCreditApproved: Credit Approved indicates if the credit approval was successful for Orders • IsDelivered: • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. Employee or Salesperson 189/461 . Customer. • IsSelected: • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region.

Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment.• BillTo ID: The Bill/Invoice To indicates the address to use when remitting bills • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. • IsDiscountPrinted: The Discount Printed Checkbox indicates if the discount will be printed on the document. For example should the order be delivered when the entire order is complete. • InvoiceRule: The Invoice Rule defines how a Business Partner is invoiced and the frequency of invoicing. 190/461 . • FreightCostRule: The Freight Cost Rule indicates the method used when charging for freight. when a line is complete or as the products become available. • DeliveryViaRule: The Delivery Via indicates how the products should be delivered. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. will the order be picked up or shipped. • DeliveryRule: The Delivery Rule indicates when an order should be delivered. For example.

margin and cost of items purchased or sold.• M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. • PriorityRule: The Priority indicates the importance (high. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. Not implemented yet • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. medium. low) of this document • TotalLines: The Total amount displays the total of all lines in document currency • GrandTotal: The Grand Total displays the total amount including Tax and Freight in document currency • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. This is also known as the gross price. Shipping. • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 191/461 .

The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. with centralized services. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • DropShip BPartner ID: • DropShip Location ID: • DropShip User ID: • IsSelfService: Self-Service allows users to enter data or update their data. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.) • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. The flag indicates. etc. • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Deliverynotes: Notes for the delivery • C Incoterms ID: The ID identifies a unique Incoterm • Incotermsdescription: Description of the incoterm • Generatetemplate: A button that copies the products that are defined as template in the business partner window 192/461 . • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization).g. Invoice. that this record was entered or created via Self-Service or that the user can change it via the Self-Service functionality. Delivery Note.• SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. and inter-organization transactions.

• DatePromised: The Date Promised indicates the date. Customer. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This can include Vendor. 193/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DateDelivered: • DateInvoiced: The Date Invoice indicates the date printed on the invoice.• Delivery Location ID: Location where the product will be delivered to 25. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. if any. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.3 C OrderLine The table defines the individual line items that comprise an Order • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. that an Order was promised for. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order.

• DirectShip: Direct Shipment indicates if this line will ship direct from the vendor to the customer • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • QtyOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered. • QtyInvoiced: The Invoiced Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that have been invoiced. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. • PriceLimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. 194/461 . • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency. • QtyDelivered: The Delivered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been delivered. • QtyReserved: The Reserved Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is currently reserved for other orders.• M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. Any additional charges or freight are not included. • LineNetAmt: Indicates the line net amount based on the quantity and the actual price.

• Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling, Shipping, Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. Not implemented yet • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked, warranted product. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. • S ResourceAssignment ID: The ID identifies a unique record • Ref OrderLine ID: Reference of the Sales Order Line to the corresponding Purchase Order Line or vice versa. Not implemented yet • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • IsDescription: If a line is Description Only, e.g. Product Inventory is not corrected. No accounting transactions are created and the amount or totals are not included in the document. This for including descriptional detail lines, e.g. for an Work Order. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • Lastpriceso: The last sales order price of the product with the business partner of the sales order Custom code. Deprecated • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment

195/461

• PriceStd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list

25.4

C OrderLine Offer

• C Orderline Offer ID: The ID identifies a unique offer for an order line • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • Priceoffer: Base price before apply the offer. • Amtoffer: Amount to be discounted by the offer.

25.5

C OrderTax

The table constains the tax amount for an Order based on the lines entered. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

196/461

• TaxBaseAmt: The Tax Base Amount indicates the base amount used for calculating the tax amount. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

197/461

26

Purchase specific
Material requirements are needs of material previous to purchase order

26.1

M Requisition

Contains the requirements for the materials. This requirements have a date and it’s possible to assign a vendor • M Requisition ID: The ID identifies a unique requisition • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved, the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined, the field is empty if you create a new document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). If you leave the field empty, the system will generate a document number for you. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • M Pricelist ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing, margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record

198/461

199/461 Figure 26: Purchase specific

26.2

M RequisitionLine

The table defines the individual line that comprise a requisition • M Requisitionline ID: Identifies each product required to purchase in a requisition • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Requisition ID: The ID identifies a unique requisition • Dateplanned: Refers to the due date in which payment must be done. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Pricestd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list • Pricelimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. • Pricelist: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • Linenetamt: Indicates the line net amount based on the quantity and the actual price. Any additional charges or freight are not included.

26.3

M MatchInv

This table contains all the matches between the material receipt lines and the invoice lines. It uses only for the purchase transactions. For each material receipt line we can have one or more invoice lines, so the sum of the invoice lines has to match with his material receipt line own. When everything matches it means the material receipt line is already invoiced 200/461

• M MatchInv ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines

26.4

M MatchPO

This table contains all the matches between the order lines and: 1. With the material receipt lines. For each order line we can have one or more materials receipt lines. The result of the sum of all the material receipt lines have to match with their own order line in order to be able to say that the order line has been already receipt. 2. With the invoice line. For each order line we can have one or more invoices lines. The result of the sum of all the invoices lines have to much with their own order line in order to be able to say that the order line has been already invoiced

• M MatchPO ID: The ID identifies a unique record

201/461

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines

202/461

27

Transaction

Inventory Move allows to move inventory from one location or warehouse to another. Physical Inventory allows you to generate inventory count lists. Product defines all products used by an organization. These products include those sold to customers, used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. Production defines those plan and inventory movements that occur when a product is created from a bill of materials and the work efforts of the manufacturing process. Shipment defines shipments made or to be made to a customer. Vendor Shipment defines the receipt of product or material from a Vendor. Warehouse and Locators Window defines each Warehouse, any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse.

27.1

M InOut

Contains all the material transaction due to business partner shipments • M InOut ID: The Shipment / Receipt ID indicates the unique document for this shipment or receipt. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved, the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined, the field is empty if you create a new document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). If you leave the field empty, the system will generate a document number for you. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field. The options are listed in a popup • DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. If you want to change the document status, use the Document Action field

203/461

204/461 Figure 27: Transaction .

• C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MovementType: The Movement Type indicates the type of movement (in. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. 205/461 . to production. Customer. This can include Vendor. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. This is the result of a shipment. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.• Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. receipt or inventory movement. etc) • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. out.

For example should the order be delivered when the entire order is complete. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • PriorityRule: The Priority indicates the importance (high.• POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. • DeliveryRule: The Delivery Rule indicates when an order should be delivered. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. low) of this document • DatePrinted: Indicates the Date that a document was printed. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. medium. when a line is complete or as the products become available. For example. will the order be picked up or shipped. • DeliveryViaRule: The Delivery Via indicates how the products should be delivered. • GenerateTo: A button that creates documents 206/461 . A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. Shipping. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. • FreightCostRule: The Freight Cost Rule indicates the method used when charging for freight. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling.

This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. etc. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • NoPackages: • PickDate: • ShipDate: Actual Date/Time of Shipment (pick up) • TrackingNo: • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user.g. You can then report based on a specific Campaign.) • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. and inter-organization transactions. 207/461 . Delivery Note. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.• SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. Invoice. with centralized services.

It uses for companies that rent locators or incoming materials that we don’t want to invoice • GenerateLines: A button that creates in out lines • Calculate Freight: Calculate freight cost • Delivery Location ID: Location where the product will be delivered to • M Freightcategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected 27. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.2 M InOutLine The table defines the individual line that comprise shipment line • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• UpdateLines: Update attribute lines from shipment Custom code. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. 208/461 . • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. Deprecated • Islogistic: If is logistic it won’t be invoiced. • M InOut ID: The Shipment / Receipt ID indicates the unique document for this shipment or receipt.

You cannot share data between Clients. Deprecated 27. No accounting transactions are created and the amount or totals are not included in the document. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. for an Work Order.g. warranted product. Product Inventory is not corrected. • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of.g. e. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked. 209/461 . • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • IsDescription: If a line is Description Only. This for including descriptional detail lines. • M Inoutline Type ID: The ID identifies a unique record Custom code. e.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.3 M Movement Contains all the material transactions due to movements between warehouses • M Movement ID: The Inventory Movement uniquely identifies a group of movement lines. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved.

with centralized services. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. This is the result of a shipment. and inter-organization transactions. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Move FromTo Locator: Move all the products there are in a locator to another 210/461 . receipt or inventory movement. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization).• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.

the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. 211/461 . • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. 27. • M Movement ID: The Inventory Movement uniquely identifies a group of movement lines. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.4 M MovementLine Contains the products and the quantities moved and the location it is moving from and to • M MovementLine ID: The Movement Line indicates the inventory movement document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. the system will generate a document number for you. the field is empty if you create a new document. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.g. If you leave the field empty. If the document is not saved. C Order). • M LocatorTo ID: The Locator To indicates the location where the inventory is being moved to.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. This is the result of a shipment. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 27. 212/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. You cannot share data between Clients. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. receipt or inventory movement. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.5 M Inventory Contains all the material transactions due to inventory • M Inventory ID: The Physical Inventory indicates a unique parameters for a physical inventory.• M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product.

• UpdateQty: Update the quantities that has been changed into the original quantities. This only can do it before you process the inventory • GenerateList: A button that generates a list to make an inventory of items • M PerpetualInv ID: The Perpetual Inventory identifies the Perpetual Inventory rule which generated this Physical Inventory. You cannot share data between Clients.6 M InventoryLine Contains the counts of the individual products in inventory • M InventoryLine ID: The Physical Inventory Line indicates the inventory document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. with centralized services. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. and inter-organization transactions. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. 27. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). 213/461 . • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.

• M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom.• M Inventory ID: The Physical Inventory indicates a unique parameters for a physical inventory.7 M Internal Consumption Contains all the material transactions due to maintenance without a shipment • M Internal Consumption ID: Identifies an internal consumption of products. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • QuantityOrderBook: Quantity order book 27. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. You cannot share data between Clients. • QtyBook: The Quantity Book indicates the line count stored in the system for a product in inventory • QtyCount: The Quantity Count indicates the actual inventory count taken for a product in inventory • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. 214/461 .

• Movementdate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. 215/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Movementqty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved.8 M Internal ConsumptionLine The table defines the individual product that comprise an internal consumption line • M Internal Consumptionline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. receipt or inventory movement. This is the result of a shipment. • M Internal Consumption ID: Identifies an internal consumption of products. 27.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. receipt or inventory movement.9 M Production Contains the header of the work effort • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. 216/461 . • IsCreated: Check to indicate that the records has been created and the production is ready to be processed. This is the result of a shipment.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 27.

If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. with centralized services. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • Starttime: Start time in hours.g. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the system will generate a document number for you. the field is empty if you create a new document. If you leave the field empty.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. and inter-organization transactions. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. If the document is not saved. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • Endtime: End time in hours. • Issotrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. C Order). You can then report based on a specific Campaign. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). 217/461 .

• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 218/461 .• Validating: Process to validate the work effort. • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. • ProductionQty: The Production Quantity identifies the number of products to produce • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • MA Costcenteruse: Use of the cost center. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase. You cannot share data between Clients. 27. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.10 M ProductionPlan Contains the items used and generated in a production • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • Neededquantity: How many times it is necessary to complete a phase before closing it.

• Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.• Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. 219/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. work requirement phase or production run. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Realcost: Real Cost • Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected. • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence.11 M ProductionLine Contains all the products that have been used or created in the production run and the quantities • M ProductionLine ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Secondaryqty: Secondary quantity. • Usedmaterial: Process to generate standards on production run. 27.

So&nbsp. You cannot share data between Clients. 220/461 . • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • Secquality: Custom code. • Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected. Custom code. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. A positive production means that is an output product.• MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved.12 M Transaction Contains all the material transactions for products that are defined as an item and stocked • M Transaction ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.a negative productions refers to an input product. Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • PrintLabel: Process to print labels for the product. Deprecated 27. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. or Stock. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 221/461 . out. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. receipt or inventory movement. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. You can issue Receipts. to production. Time and Expenses. etc) • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. This is the result of a shipment. • M InventoryLine ID: The Physical Inventory Line indicates the inventory document line (if applicable) for this transaction • M MovementLine ID: The Movement Line indicates the inventory movement document line (if applicable) for this transaction • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • M ProductionLine ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • C ProjectIssue ID: Issues to the project initiated by the Issue to Project process.• MovementType: The Movement Type indicates the type of movement (in. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

13 M Storage Detail Containts the current stock for every product • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • QtyOrderOnHand: The On Hand Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is on hand in a warehouse in the second uom • DateLastInventory: The Date Last Inventory Count indicates the last time an Inventory count was done. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. • M Storage Detail ID: The ID identifies a unique record 222/461 . • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. You cannot share data between Clients.27. • PreQtyOnHand: The quantity that we have already purchased but are not still in the warehouse • PreQtyOrderOnHand: The quantity that we have already purchased but are not still in the warehouse in the second uom • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • QtyOnHand: The On Hand Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is on hand in a warehouse.

• M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • QtyOrderOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered in the second uom • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • QtyReserved: The Reserved Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is currently reserved for other orders. • QtyOrderReserved: The Reserved Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is currently reserved for other orders in the second uom • QtyOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered.14 M Storage Pending Constains the reserved quantity and the ordered quantity • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product.27. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Storage Pending ID: 223/461 .

If the document is not saved. If you want to change the document status. 28. the field is empty if you create a new document. The options are listed in a popup • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. If you leave the field empty. Vendor Invoice allows you to display and enter Invoices from a Vendor. 224/461 .28 Invoice Enter expense invoices from your vendors Expense invoice Maintain Payment Schedule of unpaid invoices Customer Invoice allows you to display and enter invoices for a customer. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).g.1 C Invoice Contains all the invoices • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order). • DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system will generate a document number for you. use the Document Action field • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field.

225/461 Figure 28: Invoice .

• DateInvoiced: The Date Invoice indicates the date printed on the invoice. The conversion is then reflected in the current type. This processing is initiated by selecting the appropriate Document Action. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type.g. • IsTransferred: The transferred checkbox indicates if the transactions associated with this document should be transferred to the General Ledger. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. from Offer to Order or Invoice). • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. This can include Vendor. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. Employee or Salesperson 226/461 . • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. Customer.• Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • C DocTypeTarget ID: You can convert document types (e. • DatePrinted: Indicates the Date that a document was printed.

Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. This is also known as the gross price. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • TotalLines: The Total amount displays the total of all lines in document currency • GrandTotal: The Grand Total displays the total amount including Tax and Freight in document currency • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.• C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. • IsDiscountPrinted: The Discount Printed Checkbox indicates if the discount will be printed on the document. Not implemented yet 227/461 . Shipping. • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax.

Delivery Note. that this record was entered or created via Self-Service or that the user can change it via the Self-Service functionality. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • IsPaid: The document is paid • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • GenerateTo: A button that creates documents • SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). You can then report based on a specific Campaign.g. and inter-organization transactions. • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. with centralized services. 228/461 . Invoice. etc. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. The flag indicates. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • IsSelfService: Self-Service allows users to enter data or update their data.• C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program.) • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.

• Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. 28. • Cascade: Indicates if it is applied in an accumulative way or if it is applied to the base amount. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.2 C Invoice Discount Contains the discounts apply to the whole invoice • C Invoice Discount ID: The ID identifies a unique discount for the invoice • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • C Discount ID: Discount applicable to prices. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document.28. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. 229/461 . • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.3 C InvoiceLine Contains the individual items or charges on an Invoice • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice.

Shipping. • QtyInvoiced: The Invoiced Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that have been invoiced. • PriceLimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. Not implemented yet • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • LineNetAmt: Indicates the line net amount based on the quantity and the actual price. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency. especially that which could be converted to cash. Any additional charges or freight are not included. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 230/461 . • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. • S ResourceAssignment ID: The ID identifies a unique record • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation.

• C Invoiceline Offer ID: Offers applied to the invoice line. • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. Product Inventory is not corrected. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment 231/461 .4 C InvoiceLine Offer Contains all the offers applies to an invoice line.g. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.• M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • IsDescription: If a line is Description Only. This for including descriptional detail lines. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • PriceStd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list 28. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. for an Work Order. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. e. No accounting transactions are created and the amount or totals are not included in the document. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.g. e. • C Invoice Discount ID: The ID identifies a unique discount for the invoice • C Projectline ID: The Project Line indicates a unique project line.

28.6 C InvoiceTax Contains the total tax due based on the Invoice Lines • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. 28.5 C InvoiceLine AcctDimension Accounting dimension • C Invoiceline Acctdimension ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Amtoffer: Amount to be discounted by the offer. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document.• Priceoffer: Base price before apply the offer. 232/461 . • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Amt: Amount • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program.

• TaxBaseAmt: The Tax Base Amount indicates the base amount used for calculating the tax amount. You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. 233/461 . • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document.

234/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. you start the calculation of the commission after the transaction for that period are completed or closed. For each period. This can include Vendor.29 Commission Define how and when you want the commissions to be calculated and to whom to pay it. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.1 C Commission Contains all the commissions and when to pay a commission to whom. • DateLastRun: The Date Last Run indicates the last time that a process was run. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Customer. • C Commission ID: The Commission ID is a unique identifier of a set of commission rules. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 29. Commissions defines how commissions and royalties will be paid. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • ListDetails: The List Details checkbox indicates that the details for each document line will be displayed. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • DocBasisType: The Calculation Basis indicates the basis to be used for the commission calculation. Employee or Salesperson • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • FrequencyType: The frequency type is used for calculating the date of the next event. Commission Run displays the results of processing commissions.

235/461 Figure 29: Commission .

g. • AmtSubtract: The Subtract Amount indicates the amount to subtract from the total amount prior to multiplication. If you do not enter restricting parameters (e. • AmtMultiplier: The Multiplier Amount indicates the amount to multiply the total amount generated by this commission run by. all transactions for the period will be used to calculate the commission. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. etc. • C Commission ID: The Commission ID is a unique identifier of a set of commission rules. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. 236/461 . for specific Business Partner (Groups) or Product (Categories). If the commission run was done in summary mode then there will be a single line representing the selected documents totals. If the commission run was done in detail mode then each document that was included in the run will have its own commission line. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C CommissionLine ID: The Commission Line is a unique instance of a Commission Run. You cannot share data between Clients. 29. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.• CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user.2 C CommissionLine Define the selection criteria for paying the commission.

• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. This can include Vendor.3 C CommissionRun Contains all the commission run for a period • C CommissionRun ID: The Commission Run is a unique system defined identifier of a specific run of commission. 29. only Orders and Invoices for this Sales Reps are included in the calculation of the commission. • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. If selected. This would mean that negative commissions would not be generated. • CommissionOrders: Sales Reps are entered in Orders and Invoices. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • IsPositiveOnly: The Positive Only check box indicates that if the result of the subtraction is negative. 237/461 . it is ignored. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • Org ID: An organization is a unit of your client or legal entity . department. Product categories are used for pricing. When a Commission is processed on the Commission Screen.• QtySubtract: The Quantity Subtract identifies the quantity to be subtracted before multiplication • QtyMultiplier: The Multiplier Quantity field indicates the amount to multiply the quantities accumulated for this commission run. the Commission Run ID will display. Employee or Salesperson • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. Customer.examples are store.

• GrandTotal: The Grand Total displays the total amount including Tax and Freight in document currency • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. C Order). You cannot share data between Clients.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. If the document is not saved. the field is empty if you create a new document. 238/461 . the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. 29. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. If you leave the field empty. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the system will generate a document number for you. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • C Commission ID: The Commission ID is a unique identifier of a set of commission rules.4 C CommissionAmt Contains all the commission lines amounts • C CommissionAmt ID: The Commission Amount indicates the resulting amount from a Commission Run. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. You cannot share data between Clients. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.g.

but the suggested way is to add new correcting lines. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order.5 C CommissionDetail You may alter the amount and quantity of the detail records. • Reference: The Reference displays the source document number. It is based on the parameters as defined for this Commission Run.• C CommissionRun ID: The Commission Run is a unique system defined identifier of a specific run of commission. • C CommissionAmt ID: The Commission Amount indicates the resulting amount from a Commission Run. When a Commission is processed on the Commission Screen.The amounts are converted from the transaction currency to the Commission Currency (defined in the Commission window) • C CommissionDetail ID: The Commission Detail provides supporting information on a Commission Run. 29. • ConvertedAmt: The Converted Amount is the result of multiplying the Source Amount by the Conversion Rate for this target currency. • CommissionAmt: The Commission Amount is the total calculated commission. • ActualQty: The Actual Quantity indicates the quantity as referenced on a document. Each document line that was part of the Commission Run will be reflected here. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If the commission run was done in detail mode then each document that was included in the run will have its own commission line. 239/461 . the Commission Run ID will display. • C CommissionLine ID: The Commission Line is a unique instance of a Commission Run. If the commission run was done in summary mode then there will be a single line representing the selected documents totals. You cannot share data between Clients.

• C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. 240/461 . • Info: The Information displays data from the source document line. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • ActualAmt: Actual amount indicates the agreed upon amount for a document. • ActualQty: The Actual Quantity indicates the quantity as referenced on a document. • ConvertedAmt: The Converted Amount is the result of multiplying the Source Amount by the Conversion Rate for this target currency.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Include Product: If it is checked the selected products will be included else they will be excluded. vendors and employees. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 241/461 . 30. This includes customers. You cannot share data between Clients. otherwise the maximun applicable discount will be applied to every amount.1 M Rappel Contains all the configuration rappels • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Include Product Category: If it is checked the selected categories will be included else they will be excluded.30 Rappel Business Partner allows to define any party with whom you transact. Rappels defined the different rappels when a client reaches a certain sales volume. Each rappel is managed through different product categories and is applicable to partners that have been included. • Scaled: If rappel is scaled each scale of amount will have a different discount.

242/461 Figure 30: Rappel .

You cannot share data between Clients. This rappel only applies to business partners recorded on this tab. This can include Vendor.3 M Rappel Product Contains the discount configuration for the product • M Rappel Product ID: The ID identifies a unique product for the rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.2 M Rappel Bpartner Contains all the configuration rappels. • M Rappel Bpartner ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel for the partner • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • GenerateInvoice: A button that generates all the invoices as a result of the activity of the business partner during a period of time 30.30. Customer. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel 243/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. Employee or Salesperson • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

244/461 .5 M Rappel Scale Defines the scales where the discounts will be applied • M Rappel Scale ID: The ID identifies a unique scale for the rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 30. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. Product categories are used for pricing. • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Amnt From: The minumun amount the discount is applied to. 30. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • Amnt To: The maximun amount the discount is applied to.4 M Rappel Productcategory Contains the discount configuration for the product category • M Rappel Productcategory ID: The ID identifies a unique product category for the rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

You cannot share data between Clients. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 245/461 .30.6 M Rappel Invoice Contains all the invoices generated due to rappels conditions • M Rappel Invoice ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel for the invoice • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Rappel Bpartner ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel for the partner • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document.

for Presales or general trackingService . You cannot share data between Clients.abili 31.2 C Phase Standard Phase of the project with performance information • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C ProjectType ID: Type of the project with optional phases of the project with standard performance information • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 31. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. e. You cannot share data between Clients.1 C ProjectType Contains the differents types of a project.g. • ProjectCategory: The Project Category determines the behavior of the project:General .g. comment or help about the use of this item.31 Project Maintain Project Types and their Phases with standard performance information Project is used to define the projects which will be tracked via documents.no special accounting. Budget Project is used to manage civil works engineering projects where request for proposals are made and assigned to winning vendors. e.creates Project/Job WIP transactions . for Service/Charge projectsWork Order . • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 246/461 .no special accounting. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

247/461 Figure 31: Project .

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 248/461 . • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. comment or help about the use of this item. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 31. You cannot share data between Clients. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.3 C Task Standard Project Task • C Task ID: Standard Project Task in a Project Phase with standard effort • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. comment or help about the use of this item. • C ProjectType ID: Type of the project with optional phases of the project with standard performance information • StandardQty: • C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the system automatically creates a numeric number. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If you leave the search key empty.4 C Project Contains the Value. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. .• C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. . where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • StandardQty: 31. C Order). status.g. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. committed to and used for this project. Name and Description for each project. • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact 249/461 . . It also is defines the tracks the amounts assigned to. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. This tab is used in order to introduce information regarding a project: Address.

Customer. This can include Vendor. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. • CommittedAmt: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • PlannedQty: The Planned Quantity indicates the anticipated quantity for this project or project line • PlannedMarginAmt: The Planned Margin Amount indicates the anticipated margin amount for this project or project line. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. 250/461 . • IsCommitment: Commitment indicates if the document is legally binding. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. • PlannedAmt: The Planned Amount indicates the anticipated amount for this project or project line. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

if the amount or quantity is zero. • DateFinish: The finish date is used to indicate when the project is expected to be completed or has been completed. 251/461 . This is usually the contract date. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. The contract date is used in reports and report parameters. • InvoicedAmt: The amount invoiced • InvoicedQty: The Quantity Invoiced • ProjectBalanceAmt: The project balance is the sum of all invoices and payments • C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • IsCommitCeiling: The commitment amount and quantity is the maximum amount and quantity to be charged. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. Ignored. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation.• DateContract: The contract date is used to determine when the document becomes effective. • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • C ProjectType ID: Type of the project with optional phases of the project with standard performance information • CommittedQty: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. • GenerateTo: A button that creates documents • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount.

margin and cost of items purchased or sold. e.abili • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.creates Project/Job WIP transactions . • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. • Invoice ToProject: This option indicates if the invoices has been sent to the winner are Origen invoices 252/461 . • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment.¡BR¿Lost: The project has been won by a partner who has not been sent the budgetal or our budget has not been selected.• ProjectCategory: The Project Category determines the behavior of the project:General .g.no special accounting. This are the most tipical intiatives • Projectstatus: ¡P¿Indicates the current status of the project.there can be 5 the status of the project:¡BR¿Open: The budget is sent.g.¡BR¿No following up: No follow up the project¡BR¿Order: The project has been won by a partner we have sent a budget¡BR¿Order closed: All the products have been delivered • Projectkind: Indicates the kind of work • BillTo ID: The Bill/Invoice To indicates the address to use when remitting bills • Projectphase: Different phases for a project • GenerateOrder: ¡P¿This process lets you to generate a purchase order to this project. The project has already not been won.¡/P¿ • ChangeProjectStatus: This process changes the status of this projecto. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. Usually&nbsp. for Presales or general trackingService . • Publicprivate: A public o private enterprise. e. for Service/Charge projectsWork Order .no special accounting.

• PlannedPOAmt: Planned amount for the purchase order • LastPlannedProposalDate: Last day of following up the budget for the project • Document Copies: Number of copies • Accountno: The Account Number indicates the Number assigned to this account • Responsible ID: An employee that is the responsible of the project.generated from Phase of Project Type. • Servrevenue: Revenue services • Servcost: Service cost • Servmargin: Service margin • Expreinvoicing: Reinvoicing Expenses • Expexpenses: Expected expenses • Expmargin: Expected margin • Setprojecttype: Set Project Type and for Service Projects copy Phases and Tasks of Project Type into Project 31. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.5 C ProjectPhase Actual Phase of the Project with Status information . 253/461 .

comment or help about the use of this item. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. 254/461 . • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • CommittedAmt: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • C ProjectPhase ID: The ID identifies a unique phase for the project • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • GenerateOrder: ¡P¿This process lets you to generate a purchase order to this project. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation.¡/P¿ • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsComplete: Indication that this is complete • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency.

You cannot share data between Clients. Ignored.• IsCommitCeiling: The commitment amount and quantity is the maximum amount and quantity to be charged. 31. 255/461 . • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 31. if the amount or quantity is zero. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.6 C ProjectTask A Project Task in a Project Phase represents the actual work. • C Task ID: Standard Project Task in a Project Phase with standard effort • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.7 C ProjectLine Contians the lines (products and/or services) associated with the Project • C ProjectLine ID: The Project Line indicates a unique project line. • C ProjectTask ID: A Project Task in a Project Phase represents the actual work. • C ProjectPhase ID: The ID identifies a unique phase for the project • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. comment or help about the use of this item. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. 256/461 . which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. Product categories are used for pricing. • InvoicedAmt: The amount invoiced • InvoicedQty: The Quantity Invoiced • CommittedQty: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. • PlannedAmt: The Planned Amount indicates the anticipated amount for this project or project line. • PlannedQty: The Planned Quantity indicates the anticipated quantity for this project or project line • PlannedPrice: The Planned Price indicates the anticipated price for this project line. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • PlannedMarginAmt: The Planned Margin Amount indicates the anticipated margin amount for this project or project line. You cannot share data between Clients. • CommittedAmt: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.

• Product Value: • Product Name: Name of the product • Product Description: Description for the product 31. • C OrderPO ID: Purchase order • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing.8 C Project Vendor Contians all the vendors which have participated in the budgetting of a certain project • C Project Vendor ID: The ID identifies a unique vendor for the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• C ProjectIssue ID: Issues to the project initiated by the Issue to Project process. • DoPricing: • Plannedpoprice: Indicates the planned price for the purchase order • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. You cannot share data between Clients. You can issue Receipts. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project 257/461 . • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. or Stock. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. Time and Expenses.

• C Incoterms ID: The ID identifies a unique Incoterm • Incoterms Description: • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor. Customer. Employee or Salesperson • Datesend: The date of the proposal was sent • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner 258/461 .¡/P¿ 31. This can include Vendor. • GenerateOrder: ¡P¿This process lets you to generate a purchase order to this project. You cannot share data between Clients. margin and cost of items purchased or sold.9 C ProjectProposal Contains the budgets assigned to business partners and a project • C Projectproposal ID: The ID identifies a unique proposal for the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Customer. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. Employee or Salesperson • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions.

• Projectwon: Award contract to project • Paymentrule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment.• AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • C Paymentterm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. You cannot share data between Clients. 31.10 C ProjectProposalLine Contains all budgetted products to a Business Partner detailing information such as quantity. price. . • C Projectproposal ID: The ID identifies a unique proposal for the project • Lineno: Number of the line 259/461 . This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • HeaderNote: Using this field you can write a text that will show on the header of the document when you print it • FootNote: Using this field you can write a text that will show on the foot of the document when you print it • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. .. • C Projectproposalline ID: The ID identifies a unique line proposal for the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.11 C ProjectProposalTask Contains all the tasks that comprise a proposal • C Projectproposaltask ID: The ID identifies a unique task for the proposal of the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record 260/461 . • C Projectproposal ID: The ID identifies a unique proposal for the project • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service. You cannot share data between Clients.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Product Value: • Product Name: Name of the product • Product Description: Description for the product 31.

32. The time and expense report allows you to capture time spent on a project. • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. For example.1 S ExpenseType Contains all the expsenses types for reporting purpose • S ExpenseType ID: Expense report type • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Product categories are used for pricing. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the system automatically creates a numeric number.32 Services Time type maintains different types of time for reporting. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. 261/461 . If you leave the search key empty.g. billable time and to claim expenses. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. C Order).

262/461 Figure 32: Services .

32. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. C Order). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor. Customer.2 S TimeType Contains all the time types for reporting purposes (In parallel to Activities) • S TimeType ID: Differentiate time types for reporting purposes (In parallel to Activities) • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. comment or help about the use of this item. the system will generate a document number for you. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. If the document is not saved. If you leave the field empty. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿.g. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Employee or Salesperson 263/461 .If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.3 S TimeExpense Contains the time and expenses for the Employee or Contractor (Business Partner) • S TimeExpense ID: The ID identifies a unique record for the expense report • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 32. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). the field is empty if you create a new document.

• S TimeExpense ID: The ID identifies a unique record for the expense report • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • IsTimeReport: The line contains only time information • DateExpense: Date of expense • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. You cannot share data between Clients. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.4 S TimeExpenseLine Contains all the expense items and billable or non-billable hours • S TimeExpenseLine ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed.• DateReport: Date of Expense/Time Report • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • ExpenseAmt: Expense amount in currency 264/461 . 32.

• Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.• C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • ConvertedAmt: The Converted Amount is the result of multiplying the Source Amount by the Conversion Rate for this target currency. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. Customer. the standard price of the sales price list of the business partner (customer) is used. • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • InvoicePrice: Unit Price in the currency of the business partner! If it is 0. 265/461 . Employee or Salesperson • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. This can include Vendor. • S ResourceAssignment ID: The ID identifies a unique record • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. You can then report based on a specific Campaign.

• C ProjectPhase ID: The ID identifies a unique phase for the project • C ProjectTask ID: A Project Task in a Project Phase represents the actual work. • S TimeType ID: Differentiate time types for reporting purposes (In parallel to Activities) 266/461 .

payment rule and paramters Customer Invoice allows you to display and enter invoices for a customer. • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. Purchase Order Window defines a purchase order for an organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. Sales Order Window allows you to enter and modify Sales Orders. For example. meaning that are not coming from an invoice. the system will generate a document number for you. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. the merchant can key a transaction for settlement at which time the customer’s credit card is charged for the transaction and the proceeds are deposited into the merchant account. You cannot share data between Clients. Settlement manual allows users to create settlements that are not automatically generated by the system. Vendor Invoice allows you to display and enter Invoices from a Vendor. the field is empty if you create a new document. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules 267/461 .1 C Settlement Termination of a business operation by using its assets to discharge its liabilities.g. • C Settlement ID: Termination of a business operation by using its assets to discharge its liabilities. C Order). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). once the goods have been shipped to the customer. 33. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.33 Payment management Remitance Type defines the types of remittances defining its status. If you leave the field empty. Settlement is used to manage settlements. If the document is not saved. Only Generated and Cancelled settlements are chown here.

268/461 Figure 33: Payment management .

• User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • Chargedamt: Indicates the total amount of the payments that have been canceled and charged. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Cancelednotchargeamt: Indicates the amount that has been canceled but has generated no charges in the bank account or cash. 269/461 . • Generatedamt: Indicates the total amount of the payments that have been generated in this settlement. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.2 C Debt Payment Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. • CreateFile: Create file • Dateacct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • Settlementtype: Indicates the type of settlement (settlement or manual settlement) • SettlementOpen: Not implemented yet • Copyfrom: Copy record lines • IsTemplate: Template is checked when the element is used as a template. • C Settlement Generate ID: Refers to the settlement in which this Debt/Payment has been generated. 33. • IsReceipt: This is a sales transaction (receipt) • C Settlement Cancel ID: Refers to the settlement in which this Debt/Payment has been cancelled. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. 270/461 .

Customer.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Changesettlementcancel: • Cancel Processed: The settlement cancel is processed. • IsPaid: The document is paid • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. This can include Vendor. • IsManual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. • Dateplanned: Refers to the due date in which payment must be done. 271/461 . • C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. Withdrawal. The cash book is used to record cash transactions. Charge) for the defined time period at this Bank. Employee or Salesperson • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C CashLine ID: The Cash Journal Line indicates a unique line in a cash journal. • WriteOffAmt: The Write Off Amount indicates the amount to be written off as uncollectible. • IsValid: The element passed the validation check • C BankStatementLine ID: The Bank Statement Line identifies a unique transaction (Payment.

• GLItemAmt: • Isdirectposting: Direct Posting • C Glitem ID: General ledger item. You cannot share data between Clients. 272/461 . This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type.• Generate Processed: The settlement generate is processed. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • IsAutomaticGenerated: It is automatically generated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Status Initial: Status of a debt/payment when it is created. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 33. • Status: Current status of a debt/payment.3 C Glitem • C Glitem ID: General ledger item.

273/461 . • Replacing: Replacing process. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected.5 C Debt Payment Bal Replace GL items used to replace existing ones when the settlement is already processed but not posted. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Debt Payment Bal Replace ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 33. • Amountdebit: Debit amount • Amountcredit: Credit amount • C Glitem ID: General ledger item.4 C Debt Payment Balancing GL items used to configure the accounting entry related to this debt/payment creation. • Amountdebit: Debit amount • Amountcredit: Credit amount • C Glitem ID: General ledger item.33. • C Debt Payment Balancing ID: GL items used to configure the accounting entry related to this debt/payment creation.

6 C DP Management Document in which status of a debt/payment can be modified.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the system will generate a document number for you.33. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients. • Datetrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. the field is empty if you create a new document. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). C Order). the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. If you leave the field empty. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing 274/461 .g. • C Doctype ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment. 275/461 . • Dateacct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 33. • C Dp Managementline ID: Indicates the status change of a Debt Payment.7 C DP ManagementLine Indicates the status change of a Debt Payment. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.• User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Status From: Initial status of the debt payment. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. • Status To: Is the status that debt payment has taken. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user.

• Consolidate: When a remittance type is consolidated it will be created a cancel settlement from the debt/payments in the remittance and another one with the amount being the sum of all debt/payments. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Content: Content • C Remittance Type ID: The remittance type defines the properties the remittance has.8 C Remittance Parameter Refers to the parameters needed to make a remittance. 276/461 .9 C Remittance Type Definition of types of remittances. • C Remittance Type ID: The remittance type defines the properties the remittance has. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 33.• Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • C Remittance Parameter ID: Refers to the parameters needed to make a remittance. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 33. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

• Paymentruleconsolidated: Is the payment rule that will be applied for the consolidated debt/payments. 277/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients.• Status To: Is the status that debt payment has taken.10 C Remittance Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. • C Remittance Type ID: The remittance type defines the properties the remittance has. • C Bankaccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. • Status Returned: The returned status is the status that will be taken by the debt/payment when it is returned. 33. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • Datetrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Remittance ID: Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Settlement ID: Termination of a business operation by using its assets to discharge its liabilities.

If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. If you leave the field empty. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. It takes the different parameters (including the docuemnt type) from the remittance type.• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Debt Payment Cancelled: Generated debt payment that will cancel remittance line payment.g. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • Duedate: Date when the payment is due without deductions or discount • Getfile: Creates a File for the ebank. If the document is not saved. the field is empty if you create a new document. 33. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. 278/461 .11 C RemittanceLine Refers to a payment sent to the bank. • C Remittanceline ID: Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. C Order). the system will generate a document number for you. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • C Remittance ID: Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. You cannot share data between Clients.

279/461 .• Returned: If it is checked means that the debt/payment has been returned by the bank.

34. Charges defines the different charges that may be incurred. Vendor Charges and Handling Charges. • SwiftCode: The SWIFT code is an identifier of a Bank Not implemented yet • IsOwnBank: The Own Bank field indicates if this bank is for this Organization as opposed to a Bank for a Business Partner. Not implemented yet • Codebank: First four numbers of the bank account number which identifies the bank uniquely.34 Bank and Cash management It is necessary a Promissory format to print any Promissory Note with each Bank. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. Address. These can include Bank Charges. 280/461 . Routing No and Swift Code • C Bank ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts.1 C Bank Defines a bank that is used by an organization or business partner. • RoutingNo: The Bank Routing Number (ABA Number) identifies a legal Bank. Bank is used to define the banks and accounts associated with an organization or business partner Cash Journal is used to record disbursements from and receipts to Petty Cash Cashbook defines the bank and account against which cash transactions will be processed. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. It is used in routing checks and electronic transactions. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Process Bank Statements allows you to reconcile your Bank Statements. Each Bank is given an identifying Name.

281/461 Figure 34: Bank and Cash management .

• INE Number: Number provided by the bank to configurate remittances. Employee or Salesperson 34. You cannot share data between Clients. • Digitcontrol: Tenth number of the bank account. Each account has a unique Account No and Currency. checking etc) this account is defined as. This can include Vendor. • C Bank ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • BankAccountType: The Bank Account Type field indicates the type of account (savings. • CreditLimit: The Credit Limit field indicates the credit limit for this account. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank.2 C BankAccount Used to define one or more accounts for a Bank. • AccountNo: The Account Number indicates the Number assigned to this account • CurrentBalance: The Current Balance field indicates the current balance in this account. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 282/461 .• Codebranch: Second group of four numbers of the bank account which identifies the branch uniquely. Customer.

• Line1top: Distance to the top for the 1st line. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • StmtProcessorClass: The Statement Processor Class indicates the Java Class to process bank statements • Codeaccount: Last ten numbers of the bank account. • Line1left: Distance from the left side for the 1st line. • Line2left: Distance from the left side for the 2nd line. Currently this format is prepared for the Spanish model.3 C PromissoryFormat It is necessary a Promissory format to print any Promissory Note with each Bank. • Line2top: Distance to the top for the 2nd line. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 34. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. • Digitcontrol: Tenth number of the bank account. 283/461 . • C Promissoryformat ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.

• Param11: Position for 1st parameter of 1st line. • Param31: Position for 1st parameter of 3rd line. • Fontmonthplanned: Font size for planned month field. • Param43: Position for 3rd parameter of 4th line. • Line4left: Distance from the left side for the 4th line. • Fontyearplanned: Font size for planned year field. • Line4top: Distance to the top for the 4th line. • Printbankloc: Specifies whether bank location is going to be printed. • Param32: Position for 2nd parameter of 3rd line. • Param41: Position for 1st parameter of 4th line. • Param12: Position for 2nd parameter of 1st line. • Fontamount: Font size for amount field. • Line3left: Distance from the left side for the 3rd line. 284/461 . • Fontdayplanned: Font size for planned day field.• Line3top: Distance to the top for the 3rd line. • Param42: Position for 2nd parameter of 4th line. • Param13: Position for 3rd parameter of 1st line.

• Fontmonthtoday: Font size for month to day field. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• Fontpartnername: Font size for partner name field. • Fontyeartoday: Font size for year to day field. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • StatementDate: The Statement Date field defines the date of the statement being processed. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The statement defines all transactions that occurred • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 285/461 . • BeginningBalance: The Beginning Balance is the balance prior to making any adjustments for payments or disbursements. • Fontdaytoday: Font size for day to day field. • Fontamounttext: Font size for amount text field. • C BankStatement ID: The Bank Statement identifies a unique Bank Statement for a defined time period. 34. • IsManual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually.4 C BankStatement The Bank Statement Tab defines the Bank Statement to be reconciled.

You cannot share data between Clients. Withdrawal. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • StatementDifference: The Statement Difference reflects the difference between the Statement Ending Balance and the Actual Ending Balance. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.• EndingBalance: The Ending Balance is the result of adjusting the Beginning Balance by any payments or disbursements. • C BankStatement ID: The Bank Statement identifies a unique Bank Statement for a defined time period. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. Charge) for the defined time period at this Bank.5 C BankStatementLine The Statement Line Tab defines the individual line items on the Bank Statement. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 34. The statement defines all transactions that occurred • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • IsReversal: The Reversal check box indicates if this is a reversal of a prior transaction. • C BankStatementLine ID: The Bank Statement Line identifies a unique transaction (Payment. They can be entered manually or generated from payments entered. 286/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• C Debt Payment Create: Process to create a debt/payment. 287/461 . • ConvertChargeAmt: The Convert Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge due to currency conversions. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. Shipping. • Memo: Memo Text • ReferenceNo: The reference number can be printed on orders and invoices to allow your business partner to faster identify your records.• ValutaDate: The Effective Date indicates the date that money is available from the bank. • StmtAmt: The Statement Amount indicates the amount of a single statement line. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • TrxAmt: The Transaction Amount indicates the amount for a single transaction. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment.

• C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • BeginningBalance: The Beginning Balance is the balance prior to making any adjustments for payments or disbursements. You cannot share data between Clients. The Cash Journal will record transactions for the cash bank account • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • EndingBalance: The Ending Balance is the result of adjusting the Beginning Balance by any payments or disbursements. The cash book is used to record cash transactions. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C Cash ID: The Cash Journal uniquely identifies a Cash Journal. • StatementDate: The Statement Date field defines the date of the statement being processed.6 C Cash The Cash Journal Tab defines the parameters for this journal. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 288/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • StatementDifference: The Statement Difference reflects the difference between the Statement Ending Balance and the Actual Ending Balance.34. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. 34. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. and inter-organization transactions. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. 289/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Not implemented yet • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.• AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). You cannot share data between Clients. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.7 C CashBook The Cashbook Tab defines a unique cashbook for an organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The cash book is used to record cash transactions. with centralized services.

Restocking) • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. The Cash Journal will record transactions for the cash bank account • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • CashType: The Cash Type indicates the source for this Cash Journal Line. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.8 C CashLine The Cash Line Tab defines the individual lines for this journal. • C CashLine ID: The Cash Journal Line indicates a unique line in a cash journal. • WriteOffAmt: The Write Off Amount indicates the amount to be written off as uncollectible. • C Cash ID: The Cash Journal uniquely identifies a Cash Journal. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. • DiscountAmt: The Discount Amount indicates the discount amount for a document or line. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. Shipping.• C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 34. 290/461 .

Not implemented yet • IsSameCurrency: Not implemented yet • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. Restocking) • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This is also known as the gross price. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling.• IsGenerated: The Generated checkbox identifies a journal line that was generated from a source document. Not implemented yet • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax. Lines could also be entered manually or imported. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. For example.9 C Charge The Charge Tab defines the unique charges that may be associated with a document. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. Not implemented yet • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 34. Not implemented yet • IsSameTax: The Same Tax checkbox indicates that this charge should use the same tax as the main transaction. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. Shipping. Not implemented yet 291/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Not implemented yet • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge.

35. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30.g. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar.35 Calendar. Year and Period The Calendar Year and Periods defines the calendars that will be used for period control and reporting. You can also define non-standard calendars (e. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.1 C Calendar The Calendar Tab defines each calendar that will be used by an Organization. 35. Multiple calendars can be used. Multiple calendars can be used. • Year: The Year identifies the accounting year for a calendar. 292/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.2 C Year The Year Window is used to define each year for the specified calendar. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30. business year from July to June). • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C Year ID: The Year uniquely identifies an accounting year for a calendar.

293/461 Figure 35: Calendar. Year and Period .

Date ranges for a calendar and year cannot overlap. Each period begins on the defined Start Date and ends one day prior to the next period’s Start Date.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • C Year ID: The Year uniquely identifies an accounting year for a calendar. Each period is defined by a start and end date. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • PeriodType: The Period Type indicates the type (Standard or Adjustment) of period. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • PeriodNo: The Period No identifies a specific period for this year. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. Name and Start Date for each Calendar Year. • Drop Reg Fact Acct: Process to drop regularization accounting entry. • EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • Create Reg Fact Acct: Process to create regularization accounting entry. 35. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.3 C Period The Period Tab defines a Period No. 294/461 .

35.4 C PeriodControl The Period Control records the status of a Period (Never Opened. Closed) for each of the DocBaseTypes. For example. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • PeriodStatus: The Period Status indicates the current status for this period. ’Never Opened’. if an invoice terms was Net 10 days and the Invoice Date was 2/17/2000 the due date would be 2/27/2000. • DocBaseType: The Document Base Type identifies the base or starting point for a document. • C PeriodControl ID: The Period Control shows the status of a Period (Never Opened. 35. Opened. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Opened. Multiple document types may share a single document base type.5 C NonBusinessDay The Non Business Days Tab defines those days to exclude when calculating the due date for given payment terms. For example ’Close Period’ or ’Open Period’. 295/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Closed) for each of the DocBaseTypes. If 2/27/2000 was defined • C NonBusinessDay ID: The Non Business Day identifies a day that should not be considered a day when business is transacted • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • PeriodAction: The Period Action indicates the action to be taken for this period. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. ’Open’. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. For example ’Closed’.

296/461 . For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar. Multiple calendars can be used.• Date1: The Date field identifies a calendar date on which business will not be conducted.

36. You cannot share data between Clients. Each Organization will select an Accounting Schema to use.36 Accounting Schema Accounting Schema defines an accounting method and the elements that will comprise an account structure. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Average) Not implemented yet • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AutoPeriodControl: In the Automatic Period Control. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • CostingMethod: The Costing Method indicates how costs will be calculated (Standard.1 C AcctSchema The Accounting Schema Tab defines the controls used for accounting. periods are opened and closed based on the current date. Cash based method recognizes income when then payment is received. • GAAP: The GAAP identifies the account principles that this accounting schema will adhere to. Not implemented yet 297/461 . currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If the Manual alternative is activated. • IsAccrual: The Accrual checkbox indicates if this accounting schema will use accrual based account or cash based accounting. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. you have to open and close periods explicitly. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The Accrual method recognizes revenue when the product or service is delivered.

298/461 Figure 36: Accounting Schema .

• C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • Period OpenHistory: If Automatic Period Control is enabled, the current period is calculated based on the system date and you can always post to all days in the current period. History Days enable to post to previous periods. E.g. today is May 15th and History Days is set to 30, you can post back to April 15th Not implemented yet • Period OpenFuture: If Automatic Period Control is enabled, the current period is calculated based on the system date and you can always post to all days in the current period. Future Days enable to post to future periods. E.g. today is Apr 15th and Future Days is set to 30, you can post up to May 15th Not implemented yet • Separator: The Element Separator defines the delimiter printed between elements of the structure • HasAlias: The Alias checkbox indicates that account combination can be selected using a user defined alias or short key. Not implemented yet • HasCombination: The Combination Control checkbox indicates if the combination of account elements will be verified against the defined acceptable combination. Not implemented yet • IsTradeDiscountPosted: If the invoice is based on an item with a list price, the amount based on the list price and the discount is posted instead of the net amount.Example: Quantity 10 - List Price: 20 - Actual Price: 17If selected for a sales invoice 200 is posted to Produc Not implemented yet • IsDiscountCorrectsTax: Payment discounts may require to correct the tax. This primarily applicable in VAT systems. If the original invoice had tax records, the payment discount, write-off, etc. is corrected by the tax. The calculation of the tax is prorated based on the invoice. Not implemented yet

36.2

C AcctSchema Element

The Account Schema Element defines the elements that comprise the account key. A name is defined which will display in documents. Also the order of the elements and if they are balanced and mandatory are indicated. • C AcctSchema Element ID: The Account Schema Element defines each element that comprise the account key.

299/461

• C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • ElementType: The Element Type indicates if this element is the Account element or is a User Defined element. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database. • IsBalanced: Needs to be balanced. • Org ID: An organization is a unit of your client or legal entity - examples are store, department. • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage.

300/461

• C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing

36.3

C AcctSchema Table

Group of tables that can be posted. • C Acctschema Table ID: Group of tables that can be posted. • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Acctdescription: SQL that will compose the description of the entries for this table when documents are posted.

36.4

C AcctSchema GL

The General Ledger defines error and balance handling to use as well as the necessary accounts for posting to General Ledger. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

301/461

• UseSuspenseBalancing: Use Suspense Balancing • SuspenseBalancing Acct: Account used for suspense balancing • UseSuspenseError: Use Suspense Error • SuspenseError Acct: Accout used for suspense error • UseCurrencyBalancing: Use Currency Balancing • CurrencyBalancing Acct: The Currency Balancing Account indicates the account to used when a currency is out of balance (generally due to rounding) • RetainedEarning Acct: Account used for retained earning • IncomeSummary Acct: Account used for income summary • IntercompanyDueTo Acct: The Intercompany Due To Account indicates the account that represents money owed to other organizations. Not implemented yet • IntercompanyDueFrom Acct: The Intercompany Due From account indicates the account that represents money owed to this organization from other organizations. • PPVOffset Acct: Offset account for standard costing purchase price variances. The counter account is Product PPV.

36.5

C AcctSchema Default

Defines default accounts for an Accounting Schema. These values will display when a new document is opened. The user can override these defaults within the document. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

302/461

• W Inventory Acct: The Warehouse Inventory Asset Account identifies the account used for recording the value of your inventory. • W InvActualAdjust Acct: In actual costing systems, this account is used to post Inventory value adjustments. You could set it to the standard Inventory Asset account. Not implemented yet • W Differences Acct: The Warehouse Differences Account indicates the account used recording differences identified during inventory counts. • W Revaluation Acct: The Inventory Revaluation Account identifies the account used to records changes in inventory value due to currency revaluation. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. • P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. • P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product.

303/461

• C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. • C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. Not implemented yet • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Exp Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount expenses. Not implemented yet • WriteOff Acct: The Write Off Account identifies the account to book write off transactions to. • PayDiscount Rev Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount revenues. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedGain Acct: The Unrealized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedLoss Acct: The Unrealized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedGain Acct: The Realized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have been realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedLoss Acct: The Realized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet

304/461

• Withholding Acct: The Withholding Account indicates the account used to record withholdings. • E Prepayment Acct: The Employee Prepayment Account identifies the account to use for recording expense advances made to this employee. Not implemented yet • E Expense Acct: The Employee Expense Account identifies the account to use for recording expenses for this employee. Not implemented yet • PJ Asset Acct: The Project Asset account is the account used as the final asset account in capital projects Not implemented yet • PJ WIP Acct: The Work in Process account is the account used in capital projects until the project is completed • T Expense Acct: The Tax Expense Account indicates the account used to record the taxes that have been paid that cannot be reclaimed. Not implemented yet • T Liability Acct: The Tax Liability Account indicates the account used to record your tax liability declaration. Not implemented yet • T Receivables Acct: The Tax Receivables Account indicates the account used to record the tax credit amount after your tax declaration. Not implemented yet • T Due Acct: The Tax Due Account indicates the account used to record taxes that you are liable to pay. • T Credit Acct: The Tax Credit Account indicates the account used to record taxes that can be reclaimed • B InTransit Acct: The Bank in Transit Account identifies the account to be used for funds which are in transit. • B Asset Acct: The Bank Asset Account identifies the account to be used for booking changes to the balance in this bank account

305/461

• B Expense Acct: The Bank Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording charges or fees incurred from this Bank. • B InterestRev Acct: The Bank Interest Revenue Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest revenue from this Bank. Not implemented yet • B InterestExp Acct: The Bank Interest Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest expenses. Not implemented yet • B Unidentified Acct: The Bank Unidentified Receipts Account identifies the account to be used when recording receipts that can not be reconciled at the present time. Not implemented yet • B UnallocatedCash Acct: Receipts not allocated to Invoices Not implemented yet • B PaymentSelect Acct: AP Payment Selection Clearing Account • B SettlementGain Acct: The Bank Settlement Gain account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency gain when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B SettlementLoss Acct: The Bank Settlement loss account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency loss when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B RevaluationGain Acct: The Bank Revaluation Gain Account identifies the account to be used for recording gains that are recognized when converting currencies. • B RevaluationLoss Acct: The Bank Revaluation Loss Account identifies the account to be used for recording losses that are recognized when converting currencies. • Ch Expense Acct: The Charge Expense Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid to vendors. • Ch Revenue Acct: The Charge Revenue Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid by customers. Not implemented yet

306/461

• UnEarnedRevenue Acct: The Unearned Revenue indicates the account used for recording invoices sent for products or services not yet delivered. It is used in revenue recognition Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceivables Acct: The Not Invoiced Receivables account indicates the account used for recording receivables that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedRevenue Acct: The Not Invoiced Revenue account indicates the account used for recording revenue that has not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceipts Acct: The Not Invoiced Receipts account indicates the account used for recording receipts for materials that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • CB Asset Acct: The Cash Book Asset Account identifies the account to be used for recording payments into and disbursements from this cash book. • CB CashTransfer Acct: Account for Invoices paid by cash Not implemented yet • CB Differences Acct: The Cash Book Differences Account identifies the account to be used for recording any differences that affect this cash book • CB Expense Acct: The Cash Book Expense Account identifies the account to be used for general, non itemized expenses. • CB Receipt Acct: The Cash Book Receipt Account identifies the account to be used for general, non itemized cash book receipts. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C Acctschema Default ID: Default accounts for an Accounting Schema. • Status: Status for the debt payment • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account Not implemented yet • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account Not implemented yet 307/461

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Isshown: Element will be displayed. currency and calendar • Isreport: The Report checkbox indicates that this record is a report as opposed to a process 308/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Accountingrpt Element ID: Element that will be part of an accounting report.• A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet 36. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values.6 AD AccountingRpt Element Elements that will compose an accounting report. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Issummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Allows user to configure his own accounting report. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Filteredbyorganization: • Temporaryfiltertype: • Account ID: The (natural) account used • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.

• Report Type: Refers to the way that this report is gong to calculate the amount for this entry. 309/461 .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsBalancing: The Balancing checkbox indicates the this element must balance in each journal transaction. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. This is commonly used to define parts of an organization which report as their own entity. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with.00. Additionally. Not implemented yet • IsNaturalAccount: The natural account is often based on (industry specific) chart of accounts Not implemented yet • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. 37. Balancing is not an option for the Account element. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. For example. The User Defined Elements are optional. • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. They are used in reports for defining report points 310/461 . if cost centers have been defined as an element which is balance then the debits and credits for each unique cost center must net to 0. a Type of Account or User Defined is selected.1 C Element The Element defines the Name. Each Account Schema must have an Account Element type.37 Account Element Account Combination defines and displays valid account combinations. Description and Format for an Element. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • ElementType: The Element Type indicates if this element is the Account element or is a User Defined element. Account Element is used to define and maintain the Accounting Element and User Defined Elements.

311/461 Figure 37: Account Element .

The account type is used to determine what taxes. Not implemented yet 37. the system automatically creates a numeric number. validating payables and receivables for business partners. Not implemented yet • Add1Tree ID: The Additional Tree is used to define alternate roll ups which can be used in reporting. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. you may have a Business Partner Tree which rolls up based on geographic location and an additional tree which rolls up based on industry. Note: Memo account amounts are ignored when checking for balancing 312/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. if any are applicable. The values must conform to the format defined.Owner Equity. you may have a Business Partner Tree which rolls up based on geographic location and an additional tree which rolls up based on industry. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.g. If the Element is an Account Type then the Account Classification (Asset. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.Expense. For example.Asset.Liability. O.Memo. For example. L . • AccountType: Valid account types are A . • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. C Order). If you leave the search key empty. E .and summarization levels.2 C ElementValue The individual valid values for the Element. Liability etc) and posting controls are also defined • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. R -Revenue and M. • Add2Tree ID: The Additional Tree is used to define alternate roll ups which can be used in reporting.

• IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Not implemented yet • PostBudget: The Post Budget indicates if budget values can be posted to this element value. Not implemented yet • PostEncumbrance: Not implemented yet • PostStatistical: Not implemented yet • IsBankAccount: The Bank Account checkbox indicates if this is account is the bank account. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range Not implemented yet • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range Not implemented yet • PostActual: The Post Actual indicates if actual values can be posted to this element value.• AccountSign: Indicates if the expected balance for this account should be a Debit or a Credit. • IsDocControlled: Not implemented yet • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. • IsForeignCurrency: Balances in foreign currency accounts are held in the nominated currency and translated to functional currency • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 313/461 .

breakdown or subaccount). when positive it is shown only if the amount is positive and when negative it is shown only if the amount is negative. • Account ID: The (natural) account used • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 37. • ShowValueCond: Condition to show value. You cannot share data between Clients.• ShowElement: Displays this element. 37. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display 314/461 . • C Elementvalue Operand ID: Operand used to calculate the amount of this element value. account. • ElementLevel: Indicates the level of the account (heading.3 C ElementValue Operand Indicates the operands used to calculate the amount of this element value. • Sign: Sign applied to the operand to calculate the amount of the element value.4 C ElementValue Trl Defines the translation of the element value to an alternate language • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. when algebraic it is always dilplayed. • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.5 C ValidCombination The Account Combination Tab defines and displays valid account combination. 37. the Account Receivable Account for Garden World may be aliased as GW AR. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Combination: The Combination field defines the unique combination of element values which comprise this account. An Alias can be defined to facilitate document entry. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. currency and calendar • Account ID: The (natural) account used 315/461 . • IsFullyQualified: The Fully Qualified check box indicates that all required elements for an account combination are present. • Alias: The Alias field allows you to define a alternate method for referring to a full account combination. • C ValidCombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. For example.

Customer. Employee or Salesperson • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). with centralized services. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. This can include Vendor. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. and inter-organization transactions. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • C LocTo ID: The Location To indicates the location that a product was moved to. Not implemented yet • C LocFrom ID: The Location From indicates the location that a product was moved from.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 316/461 .

Product defines all products used by an organization. Unit of Measure. You cannot share data between Clients. Business Partner allows you to define any party with whom you transact. The group of assets determines default accounts. Warehouse and Locators defines each Warehouse.1 C BP Group Acct Defines the default accounts for any business partner that references this group. Project is used to define the projects which will be tracked via documents. Cashbook defines the bank and account against which cash transactions will be processed. Update Name. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. These products include those sold to customers. The product for the resource is automatically created and synchronized. These groups can be used in generating Price Lists.38 Accounting Maintain your Resources. any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. Tax Rate defines the different taxes used for each tax category. used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. 38. in the Resource and don’t change it in the product. These default values can be modified for each business partner if required. This includes customers. These can include Bank Charges. Accounting Schema defines an accounting method and the elements that will comprise an account structure. 317/461 . Charges defines the different charges that may be incurred. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. currency and calendar • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. vendors and employees. Product Category you to define different groups of products. defining margins and for easily assigning different accounting parameters for products. Bank is used to define the banks and accounts associated with an organization or business partner Business Partner Group allows you to define the accounting parameters at a group level. etc. Vendor Charges and Handling Charges.

318/461 Figure 38: Accounting .

It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. Not implemented yet • RealizedGain Acct: The Realized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have been realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedLoss Acct: The Realized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Exp Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount expenses.• C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. Not implemented yet 319/461 . Not implemented yet • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Rev Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount revenues. • UnrealizedGain Acct: The Unrealized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • WriteOff Acct: The Write Off Account identifies the account to book write off transactions to. Not implemented yet • C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedLoss Acct: The Unrealized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized.

• C Bp Group Acct ID: Defines the default accounts for any business partner that references this group. • C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. This can include Vendor. Customer.• NotInvoicedReceipts Acct: The Not Invoiced Receipts account indicates the account used for recording receipts for materials that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.2 C BP Customer Acct Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced on an accounts receivable transaction. • Status: Status for the debt payment 38. It is used in revenue recognition Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedRevenue Acct: The Not Invoiced Revenue account indicates the account used for recording revenue that has not yet been invoiced. 320/461 . currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • UnEarnedRevenue Acct: The Unearned Revenue indicates the account used for recording invoices sent for products or services not yet delivered. Employee or Salesperson • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceivables Acct: The Not Invoiced Receivables account indicates the account used for recording receivables that have not yet been invoiced.

3 C BP Vendor Acct Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced in an accounts payable transaction. currency and calendar • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. Employee or Salesperson • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. Not implemented yet • C Bp Customer Acct ID: Default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced on an accounts receivable transaction. You cannot share data between Clients.• C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. This can include Vendor. • Status: Status for the debt payment 38. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • Status: Status for the debt payment 321/461 . Customer. Not implemented yet • C Bp Vendor Acct ID: Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced in an accounts payable transaction.

• P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. Customer. You cannot share data between Clients. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Any product that uses a product category can inherit its default accounting parameters. Not implemented yet • E Prepayment Acct: The Employee Prepayment Account identifies the account to use for recording expense advances made to this employee.4 C BP Employee Acct Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced on a expense reimbursement. Employee or Salesperson • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet 38. 322/461 . This can include Vendor.5 M Product Category Acct Defines default accounting parameters. Product categories are used for pricing. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. You cannot share data between Clients. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • E Expense Acct: The Employee Expense Account identifies the account to use for recording expenses for this employee. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.38. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.

• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.6 M Product Acct Defines the defaults to use when generating accounting transactions for documents which contain this product. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product. 38. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. You cannot share data between Clients. • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price.• P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 323/461 .

It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price.• P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet 38. • P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. 324/461 .7 C Tax Acct Defines the accounting parameters to be used for transactions referencing this Tax Rate. Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. • T Due Acct: The Tax Due Account indicates the account used to record taxes that you are liable to pay. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line.

You cannot share data between Clients.8 C BankAccount Acct Defines the accounts used for transactions with this Bank. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank.• T Liability Acct: The Tax Liability Account indicates the account used to record your tax liability declaration. Not implemented yet • T Credit Acct: The Tax Credit Account indicates the account used to record taxes that can be reclaimed • T Receivables Acct: The Tax Receivables Account indicates the account used to record the tax credit amount after your tax declaration. Not implemented yet 325/461 . • B Asset Acct: The Bank Asset Account identifies the account to be used for booking changes to the balance in this bank account • B Expense Acct: The Bank Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording charges or fees incurred from this Bank. • B InTransit Acct: The Bank in Transit Account identifies the account to be used for funds which are in transit. Not implemented yet 38. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • B InterestRev Acct: The Bank Interest Revenue Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest revenue from this Bank. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • T Expense Acct: The Tax Expense Account indicates the account used to record the taxes that have been paid that cannot be reclaimed.

Not implemented yet • B Unidentified Acct: The Bank Unidentified Receipts Account identifies the account to be used when recording receipts that can not be reconciled at the present time. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.• B InterestExp Acct: The Bank Interest Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest expenses. Not implemented yet • B SettlementLoss Acct: The Bank Settlement loss account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency loss when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. The cash book is used to record cash transactions. • B RevaluationLoss Acct: The Bank Revaluation Loss Account identifies the account to be used for recording losses that are recognized when converting currencies. 326/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. Not implemented yet • B UnallocatedCash Acct: Receipts not allocated to Invoices Not implemented yet • B PaymentSelect Acct: AP Payment Selection Clearing Account Not implemented yet • B SettlementGain Acct: The Bank Settlement Gain account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency gain when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same.9 C CashBook Acct Defines the accounting parameters for transaction involving a cashbook. 38. Not implemented yet • B RevaluationGain Acct: The Bank Revaluation Gain Account identifies the account to be used for recording gains that are recognized when converting currencies.

If an asset group is selected in the product category. • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 38.• CB Asset Acct: The Cash Book Asset Account identifies the account to be used for recording payments into and disbursements from this cash book. You cannot share data between Clients. • CB Receipt Acct: The Cash Book Receipt Account identifies the account to be used for general. • CB CashTransfer Acct: Account for Invoices paid by cash • CB Differences Acct: The Cash Book Differences Account identifies the account to be used for recording any differences that affect this cash book • CB Expense Acct: The Cash Book Expense Account identifies the account to be used for general. non itemized expenses. • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts.10 A Asset Group Acct Defines the default accounts for any asset that references this group. non itemized cash book receipts. assets are created when delivering the asset. • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet 327/461 .

• A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. Shipping. You cannot share data between Clients.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.11 A Asset Acct Defines the default accounts for this asset. Restocking) • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.12 C Charge Acct Defines the accounting parameters used for transactions including a charge or charges. • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet 38. currency and calendar 328/461 . • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. especially that which could be converted to cash. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. 38.

• Ch Expense Acct: The Charge Expense Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid to vendors.14 C Glitem Acct Defines the default accounts for this general ledger item.13 C Project Acct The Accounting Tab is used to define the Asset Account to use when a project is completed and the associated asset realized. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. 329/461 . • C Glitem ID: General ledger item. 38. • Ch Revenue Acct: The Charge Revenue Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid by customers. You cannot share data between Clients. The Accounting Tab is used to define the Asset Account to use when a project is completed and the associated asset realized.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • PJ Asset Acct: The Project Asset account is the account used as the final asset account in capital projects Not implemented yet • PJ WIP Acct: The Work in Process account is the account used in capital projects until the project is completed Not implemented yet 38. You cannot share data between Clients.

Not implemented yet • W Differences Acct: The Warehouse Differences Account indicates the account used recording differences identified during inventory counts. • Glitem Debit Acct: Debit account for the general ledger item. • Glitem Credit Acct: Credit account for the general ledger item. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • W InvActualAdjust Acct: In actual costing systems. 38. • W Inventory Acct: The Warehouse Inventory Asset Account identifies the account used for recording the value of your inventory. You could set it to the standard Inventory Asset account. this account is used to post Inventory value adjustments. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet 330/461 .• C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • W Revaluation Acct: The Inventory Revaluation Account identifies the account used to records changes in inventory value due to currency revaluation. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided.15 M Warehouse Acct Defines the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• W InvActualAdjust Acct: In actual costing systems. These values will display when a new document is opened. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • W Inventory Acct: The Warehouse Inventory Asset Account identifies the account used for recording the value of your inventory. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory.38. Not implemented yet 331/461 . You could set it to the standard Inventory Asset account. • W Revaluation Acct: The Inventory Revaluation Account identifies the account used to records changes in inventory value due to currency revaluation. • P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. Not implemented yet • W Differences Acct: The Warehouse Differences Account indicates the account used recording differences identified during inventory counts.16 C AcctSchema Default Defines default accounts for an Accounting Schema. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. You cannot share data between Clients. this account is used to post Inventory value adjustments. • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. The user can override these defaults within the document.

Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Exp Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount expenses. • C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. Not implemented yet • WriteOff Acct: The Write Off Account identifies the account to book write off transactions to. • PayDiscount Rev Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount revenues. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedGain Acct: The Unrealized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. • C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. Not implemented yet 332/461 . Not implemented yet • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities.• P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product.

Not implemented yet • T Receivables Acct: The Tax Receivables Account indicates the account used to record the tax credit amount after your tax declaration. • E Prepayment Acct: The Employee Prepayment Account identifies the account to use for recording expense advances made to this employee. Not implemented yet • RealizedGain Acct: The Realized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have been realized. Not implemented yet • Withholding Acct: The Withholding Account indicates the account used to record withholdings. Not implemented yet • T Liability Acct: The Tax Liability Account indicates the account used to record your tax liability declaration.• UnrealizedLoss Acct: The Unrealized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedLoss Acct: The Realized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • T Due Acct: The Tax Due Account indicates the account used to record taxes that you are liable to pay. Not implemented yet • E Expense Acct: The Employee Expense Account identifies the account to use for recording expenses for this employee. Not implemented yet • PJ Asset Acct: The Project Asset account is the account used as the final asset account in capital projects Not implemented yet • PJ WIP Acct: The Work in Process account is the account used in capital projects until the project is completed • T Expense Acct: The Tax Expense Account indicates the account used to record the taxes that have been paid that cannot be reclaimed. 333/461 .

334/461 .• T Credit Acct: The Tax Credit Account indicates the account used to record taxes that can be reclaimed • B InTransit Acct: The Bank in Transit Account identifies the account to be used for funds which are in transit. • B InterestRev Acct: The Bank Interest Revenue Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest revenue from this Bank. Not implemented yet • B UnallocatedCash Acct: Receipts not allocated to Invoices Not implemented yet • B PaymentSelect Acct: AP Payment Selection Clearing Account • B SettlementGain Acct: The Bank Settlement Gain account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency gain when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B SettlementLoss Acct: The Bank Settlement loss account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency loss when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B InterestExp Acct: The Bank Interest Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest expenses. Not implemented yet • B RevaluationGain Acct: The Bank Revaluation Gain Account identifies the account to be used for recording gains that are recognized when converting currencies. • B Asset Acct: The Bank Asset Account identifies the account to be used for booking changes to the balance in this bank account • B Expense Acct: The Bank Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording charges or fees incurred from this Bank. Not implemented yet • B Unidentified Acct: The Bank Unidentified Receipts Account identifies the account to be used when recording receipts that can not be reconciled at the present time.

• B RevaluationLoss Acct: The Bank Revaluation Loss Account identifies the account to be used for recording losses that are recognized when converting currencies. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceipts Acct: The Not Invoiced Receipts account indicates the account used for recording receipts for materials that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedRevenue Acct: The Not Invoiced Revenue account indicates the account used for recording revenue that has not yet been invoiced. • Ch Expense Acct: The Charge Expense Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid to vendors. It is used in revenue recognition Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceivables Acct: The Not Invoiced Receivables account indicates the account used for recording receivables that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • UnEarnedRevenue Acct: The Unearned Revenue indicates the account used for recording invoices sent for products or services not yet delivered. • Ch Revenue Acct: The Charge Revenue Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid by customers. 335/461 . • CB CashTransfer Acct: Account for Invoices paid by cash Not implemented yet • CB Differences Acct: The Cash Book Differences Account identifies the account to be used for recording any differences that affect this cash book • CB Expense Acct: The Cash Book Expense Account identifies the account to be used for general. non itemized cash book receipts. Not implemented yet • CB Asset Acct: The Cash Book Asset Account identifies the account to be used for recording payments into and disbursements from this cash book. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • CB Receipt Acct: The Cash Book Receipt Account identifies the account to be used for general. non itemized expenses.

• Status: Status for the debt payment • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account Not implemented yet • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet 336/461 .• C Acctschema Default ID: Default accounts for an Accounting Schema.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Each Category may be used on a document. manual journal or import • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. Multiple document types may share a single document base type. 337/461 .2 GL JournalBatch The GL Journal Batch Tab defines the control parameters for a Journal Batch.39 General Ledger and Budget GL Category allows you to define categories to be used in journals. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. These categories provide a method of optionally grouping and reporting on journals. You cannot share data between Clients. GL Journal allows you to enter and modify manual journal entries 39. • DocBaseType: The Document Base Type identifies the base or starting point for a document.1 GL Category The GL Category Tab defines optional identifiers for a document or journal. A Batch can consist of multiple Journals. 39. user defined method of grouping journal lines. entered manually or imported. Journals can be generated from a document. • CategoryType: The Category Type indicates the source of the journal for this category. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • GL JournalBatch ID: The General Ledger Journal Batch identifies a group of journals to be processed as a group.

338/461 Figure 39: General Ledger and Budget .

C Order). user defined method of grouping journal lines. If the document is not saved. • DateDoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the system will generate a document number for you. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. Encumbrance.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. You cannot share data between Clients. • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If you leave the field empty. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. the field is empty if you create a new document. • PostingType: The Posting Type indicates the type of amount (Actual. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date.g. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • TotalDr: The Total Debit indicates the total debit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency • TotalCr: The Total Credit indicates the total credit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency 339/461 . Budget) this journal updated.

• Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. the system will generate a document number for you. 39. 340/461 . before the document is processed. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • GL Journal ID: The General Ledger Journal identifies a group of journal lines which represent a logical business transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.3 GL Journal The GL Journal Tab defines the control parameters for a single GL Journal. currency and calendar • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved.g. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. no check is performed. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order). You cannot share data between Clients. the field is empty if you create a new document. • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • IsTemplate: Template is checked when the element is used as a template.• ControlAmt: If the control amount is zero.Otherwise the total Debit amount must be equal to the control amount. If you leave the field empty.

If you want to change the document status. • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. For example you may have a set of rates used for daily transactions with a rate type of SPOT and rates for currency revaluation defined as REVAL. use the Document Action field • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • CurrencyRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of rate to use when retrieving the conversion rate. The options are listed in a popup • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date.• DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. user defined method of grouping journal lines. • GL Budget ID: The General Ledger Budget identifies a user defined budget. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. Not implemented yet • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 341/461 . • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. These can be used in reporting as a comparison against your actual amounts. Encumbrance. • PostingType: The Posting Type indicates the type of amount (Actual. • DateDoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. Budget) this journal updated. It allows you to define multiple rates for the same to and from currency.

• TotalDr: The Total Debit indicates the total debit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency • TotalCr: The Total Credit indicates the total credit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency • ControlAmt: If the control amount is zero. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.4 GL JournalLine The GL Journal Line Tab defines the individual debit and credit transactions that comprise a journal. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 39. before the document is processed.• CurrencyRate: The Currency Conversion Rate indicates the rate to use when converting the source currency to the accounting currency • GL JournalBatch ID: The General Ledger Journal Batch identifies a group of journals to be processed as a group.Otherwise the total Debit amount must be equal to the control amount. no check is performed. You cannot share data between Clients. • GL JournalLine ID: The General Ledger Journal Line identifies a single transaction in a journal. • GL Journal ID: The General Ledger Journal identifies a group of journal lines which represent a logical business transaction 342/461 .

• IsGenerated: The Generated checkbox identifies a journal line that was generated from a source document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AmtSourceCr: The Source Credit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. Lines could also be entered manually or imported. • AmtSourceDr: The Source Debit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. It allows you to define multiple rates for the same to and from currency. 343/461 .• Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • CurrencyRate: The Currency Conversion Rate indicates the rate to use when converting the source currency to the accounting currency • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • AmtAcctDr: The Account Debit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • AmtAcctCr: The Account Credit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. For example you may have a set of rates used for daily transactions with a rate type of SPOT and rates for currency revaluation defined as REVAL. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • CurrencyRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of rate to use when retrieving the conversion rate.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. They can be financial. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Budget ID: Used to define the anticipated costs of doing business • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. They are used in reporting as a comparison to actual amounts. • Copybudget: Process to copy a budget. • Budget Type: Clasifies budgets.5 C Budget The Budgets are used to define the anticipated costs of doing business. 39. • C Budgetline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 39. sales or purchase budgets.• C ValidCombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Exportexcel: Process to export budget to excel file. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.6 C BudgetLine Refers to the lines associated to a budget. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Year ID: The Year uniquely identifies an accounting year for a calendar. 344/461 .

• C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.• C ValidCombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. Not implemented yet • C Salesregion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. This can include Vendor. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. with centralized services. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. Employee or Salesperson • AD Orgtrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. and inter-organization transactions. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. 345/461 . • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Customer.

346/461 . Product categories are used for pricing. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners.• User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • C Budget ID: Used to define the anticipated costs of doing business • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service.

• Help: The Help field contains a hint. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. If you leave the search key empty. comment or help about the use of this item.40 Assets An asset is created by delivering a product. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. The group of assets determines default accounts. especially that which could be converted to cash. assets are created when delivering the asset. An asset can be used internally or be a customer asset. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. assets are created when delivering the asset. 347/461 . If an asset group is selected in the product category. If a asset group is selected in the product category. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. C Order). You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.1 A Asset Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. 40.g. especially that which could be converted to cash.

348/461 Figure 40: Assets .

• IsOwned: The asset may not be in possession. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner 349/461 . This can include Vendor. if the asset is used internally and depreciated.usually used as start date for depreciation.• GuaranteeDate: Date when the normal guarantee or availability expires • AssetServiceDate: The date when the asset was put into service . but the asset is legally owned by the organization • AssetDepreciationDate: Date of the last deprecation. • UseLifeYears: Years of the usable life of the asset • UseLifeMonths: Months of the usable life of the asset • LifeUseUnits: Life use and the actual use may be used to calculate the depreciation • UseUnits: Currently used units of the assets • IsDisposed: The asset is no longer used and disposed • AssetDisposalDate: Date when the asset is/was disposed • IsInPosession: Assets which are not in possession are e.g. • LocationComment: • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. Customer. at Customer site and may or may not be owned by the company. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

• C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Assetvalueamt: Book Value of the asset • Residualassetvalueamt: Value of the asset once it has been totally depreciated. • IsDepreciated: The asset is used internally and will be depreciated • IsFullyDepreciated: The asset costs are fully amortized. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • M AttributesetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked.• C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • Datecancelled: Cancellation date • Amortizationstartdate: Date in which this asset starts depreciating • Amortizationenddate: Date in which this asset ends depreciating • Annualamortizationporcentage: Anual percentage used to depreciate this asset. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Datepurchased: Date when this good was bougth. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. 350/461 . warranted product.

the system will generate a document number for you. If you leave the field empty.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • Profit: • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). Not implemented yet • Depreciatedpreviousamt: 351/461 .• VersionNo: Version Number • Acctvalueamt: Accounting value amount • Amortizationtype: Indicates the method used to depreciate this asset. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. If the document is not saved. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.. • Cause: • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. C Order). the field is empty if you create a new document.. • Amortizationvalueamt: Accumulate depreciation amount • Assetschedule: Refers to the periods chosen between depreciation entries (monthly. • Amortizationcalctype: This field indicates how depreciation will be calculated: choosing the time or the percentage. yearly. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.). The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • Depreciatedplan: Value that is planned to be depreciated.g.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsOwned: The asset may not be in possession. If a asset group is selected in the product category. assets are created when delivering the asset. but the asset is legally owned by the organization • IsDepreciated: The asset is used internally and will be depreciated 40. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• Depreciatedvalue: Is the value depreciated from processed amortizations. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If an asset group is selected in the product category. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item.3 A Amortization Refers to all the depreciations ocurred btween two dates • A Amortization ID: Refers to all the depreciations ocurred btween two dates • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. 40. assets are created when delivering the asset. • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. 352/461 .2 A Asset Group The group of assets determines default accounts.

• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Enddate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Totalamortization: Total Amortization amount 353/461 . • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • Startdate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program.

• A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. especially that which could be converted to cash.40. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients.4 A Amortizationline Depreciation of an asset between two dates • A Amortizationline ID: Depreciation of an asset between two dates • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Amortization Porcentage: Amortization Percentage • Amortizationamt: Amortization Amount • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 354/461 . • A Amortization ID: Refers to all the depreciations ocurred btween two dates • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.

1 Fact Acct Recods accounting entries of all accounting schemas. • Record ID: The Record ID is the internal unique identifier of a record • Line ID: Internal link • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. • Fact Acct ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.41 Accounting Facts Query the detail accounting transactions 41. user defined method of grouping journal lines. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • GL Budget ID: The General Ledger Budget identifies a user defined budget. These can be used in reporting as a comparison against your actual amounts. You cannot share data between Clients. Deprecated 355/461 . currency and calendar • Account ID: The (natural) account used • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside.

356/461 Figure 41: Accounting Facts .

• PostingType: The Posting Type indicates the type of amount (Actual. • AmtAcctDr: The Account Debit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • AmtAcctCr: The Account Credit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. and inter-organization transactions. Not implemented yet 357/461 . with centralized services. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. Customer. Encumbrance. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.• C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. Employee or Salesperson • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • AmtSourceCr: The Source Credit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AmtSourceDr: The Source Debit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. This can include Vendor. Budget) this journal updated.

• C LocFrom ID: The Location From indicates the location that a product was moved from. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C LocTo ID: The Location To indicates the location that a product was moved to. Not implemented yet 358/461 . Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. especially that which could be converted to cash.

359/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • Copyversion: Process which from a selected reference version copies it into a new one changing the correspondent time periods. If you leave the search key empty.42 Manufacturing: Process Plan A process plan is a set of sequences or processes that elaborates one or more diferent products. C Order). The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.g. • Explodephases: Indicates if the work requirement phases will be generated automatically. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.1 MA ProcessPlan In this table is defined the header of the process plan. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. You cannot share data between Clients. 42. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. the system automatically creates a numeric number.

360/461 Figure 42: Manufacturing: Process Plan .

• MA Processplan Version ID: Indicates a process plan version. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan.2 MA ProcessPlan Version This table allows different production plan versions • MA Processplan Version ID: Indicates a process plan version. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) 42. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. the field is empty if you create a new document. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. You cannot share data between Clients. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order). 361/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan. If you leave the field empty. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).3 MA Sequence In the Sequence table there are defined all the processes that belongs to the selected process plan. the system will generate a document number for you.42.g. You cannot share data between Clients. If the document is not saved.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. process required input and output product quantities&nbsp. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.as specified in&nbsp.• Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • Multiplier: ¡p¿Number of times needed to run this&nbsp. work requirement phase or production run. 362/461 .¡/p¿ • Preptime: Preparation time needed in hours.¡/p¿ • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Noqty: ¡p¿When&nbsp.for all production runs in Global Use tab. If you prefer having the total&nbsp.sequence in order to satisfy the complete process plan.¡/p¿ • Groupuse: Each work effort can have several production runs.by running the &quot.usage products (grouoped by product)&nbsp.the work requirement phases. the system automatically creates a numeric number.the same product in several ones. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.creating a production run.¡/p¿ ¡p¿If this is checked. check this box.g. Not implemented yet • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • CostCenterUse: ¡p¿The duration of this sequence in hours.generating standards&quot. If you leave the search key empty. the quantities will not be filled in and will be set to zero. You can use (consume)&nbsp. C Order).&nbsp.are automatically filled in&nbsp.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category • Calccost: Is the calculated cost amount. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan.5 MA Sequence IC Table where is stored each indirect standard cost amount for a sequence.4 MA Sequence Employee Table where is stored information about the salary costs of the standard cost calculation. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. • Calccost: Is the calculated cost amount. you need to input the standard outsourcing cost here. • MA Sequence Employee ID: Indicates each salary category standard cost amount for a sequence. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Sequence Ic ID: Indicates an indirect standard cost amount for a sequence. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 42.¡/p¿ 42.• Outsourcingcost: ¡p¿If the sequence of a Process Plan is outsourced. You cannot share data between Clients. 363/461 .

42. • MA Sequenceproduct ID: Indicates each product involved on a sequence. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated. A positive production means that is an output product. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Sequence Machine ID: Indicates each machine standard cost amount for a sequence.7 MA SequenceProduct In this table there are defined all the products involved in the sequence. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan.42. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 364/461 .a negative productions refers to an input product. You cannot share data between Clients. There must be defined both the raw materials and the generated products. • Calccost: Is the calculated cost amount. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan. • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence.6 MA Sequence Machine Table where is stored each machine standard cost amount for a sequence. So&nbsp. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

• Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. 365/461 . Deprecated • Cost: Cost amount. Deprecated • Decreaseind: Custom code. • Rejected: Percentage of parts rejected • Consumerm: Custom code. Deprecated • Decrease: Percentage of decrease. • Componentcost: Cost per component • Rminput: Custom code.

• Startdate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • Closed: Indicates if the work requirement phase has been completely done. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.1 MA WorkRequirement In this table it’s defined the header of the requirement. • Enddate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • Explote: Process to explode the phases and/or insert the correspondent products to them. 366/461 . here it’s indicated for example the process plan. 43. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. You cannot share data between Clients.43 Manufacturing: Work Requirement Work requirement defines all the manufacturing needs of the process plans. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Launchdate: The Launch Date indicates the date that the work requiremente was made. • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. Not implemented yet • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan.

367/461 Figure 43: Manufacturing: Work Requirement .

the system will generate a document number for you. • MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase.g. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. the field is empty if you create a new document. You cannot share data between Clients. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. If you leave the field empty. If the document is not saved. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. Each phase corresponds to a sequence of the selected&nbsp. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • WrType: Custom code. 368/461 .process plan.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.2 MA WRPhase In this table there are defined the diferent phases of the work requirement. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Explodephases: Indicates if the work requirement phases will be generated automatically. Deprecated 43. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. • Secondaryqty: Secondary quantity. C Order).

creating a production run.generating standards&quot.¡/p¿ • Preptime: Preparation time needed in hours.• Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. • Donequantity: Indicates the number of times that the work requirement phase has been allready processed. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Noqty: ¡p¿When&nbsp. check this box.for all production runs in Global Use tab.by running the &quot.as specified in&nbsp. You can use (consume)&nbsp.¡/p¿ ¡p¿If this is checked. the quantities will not be filled in and will be set to zero.¡/p¿ • Groupuse: Each work effort can have several production runs. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.the same product in several ones. Not implemented yet • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. work requirement phase or production run.&nbsp.the work requirement phases. If you prefer having the total&nbsp. Not implemented yet • Closed: Indicates if the work requirement phase has been completely done.usage products (grouoped by product)&nbsp. process required input and output product quantities&nbsp. • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan.are automatically filled in&nbsp. 369/461 . • CostCenterUse: ¡p¿The duration of this sequence in hours.

Deprecated • Decreaseind: Custom code. • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. There must be defined both the raw materials and the generated products. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Consumerm: Custom code. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated.3 MA WRPhaseProduct In this tab there are defined all the products involved in the work requirement phase. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Deprecated 370/461 .a negative productions refers to an input product. A positive production means that is an output product. • Movementqty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Wrphaseproduct ID: Indicates each product involved in the work requirement phase. Not implemented yet • MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase.43. So&nbsp.

You cannot share data between Clients. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product.2 MA PL IC In this table are stored the indirect costs involved on each production run.44 Manufacturing: Work Effort In work effort is stored the work efforts that the employees have done during their work day. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Pl Ic ID: Indicates the indirect costs involved on each production run. You cannot share data between Clients. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost 44. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. 371/461 . Among produced and used products is stored all related data for the costs calculation.1 MA PL Employee In this table are the employees of each salary category involved on each production run. 44. • MA Pl Employee ID: Indicates the employees of each salary category involved on each production run. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product.

372/461 Figure 44: Manufacturing: Work Effort .

• M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • MA Pl Invoiceline ID: Indicates the invoice lines involved on each production run. 44. 373/461 . • MA Pl Machine ID: Indicates the machine costs involved on each production run. • Use: Indicates the use coefficient. • Cost: Cost amount.• MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.4 MA PL Machine In this table are stored the machine costs involved on each production run. 44.3 MA PL InvoiceLine In this table are stored the invoice lines involved on each production run.

• MA Weemployee ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Weincidence ID: Indicates each incidence of a work effort.5 MA WEEmployee In this table are introduced all the employees that have participate on the work effort. Customer. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.6 MA WEIncidence In this table are all the incidences that may have happened. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Employee or Salesperson 44. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients.44. 374/461 . • Endtime: End time in hours. This can include Vendor. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • MA Incidence ID: Unique identifier for incidence • Starttime: Start time in hours.

• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. with centralized services. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. This is the result of a shipment. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment.7 M Production Contains the header of the work effort • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.44. • IsCreated: Check to indicate that the records has been created and the production is ready to be processed. 375/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). receipt or inventory movement. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. and inter-organization transactions. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.

the field is empty if you create a new document.g. C Order). • Validating: Process to validate the work effort. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.• C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. You cannot share data between Clients. 44. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. the system will generate a document number for you.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. If you leave the field empty. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • Starttime: Start time in hours. • Issotrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • Endtime: End time in hours. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. 376/461 . If the document is not saved.8 M ProductionLine Contains all the products that have been used or created in the production run and the quantities • M ProductionLine ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • PrintLabel: Process to print labels for the product. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated. • Secquality: Custom code. • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected.a negative productions refers to an input product. Deprecated 377/461 . • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.• M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. A positive production means that is an output product. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. So&nbsp. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Custom code.

• Neededquantity: How many times it is necessary to complete a phase before closing it. • Realcost: Real Cost 378/461 . • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • ProductionQty: The Production Quantity identifies the number of products to produce • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.44. You cannot share data between Clients. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • MA Costcenteruse: Use of the cost center. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.9 M ProductionPlan Contains the items used and generated in a production • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

When the work effort is processed the global use products are distributed proportionaly.• Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected.10 MA GlobalUse This tabs contains global consume products. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. 379/461 . • Usedmaterial: Process to generate standards on production run. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Movementqty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Secondaryqty: Secondary quantity. • MA Globaluse ID: Identifies a globally used product in the work effort. • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence. 44. work requirement phase or production run. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product.

• M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.• Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes 380/461 .

Toolset defines different toolset registration for further use on the production.45 Manufacturing: Toolset Work Station defines the diferent work stations of the enterprise. 45. the system automatically creates a numeric number. 45.1 MA Toolset The Toolset tab is used to detail the different types of toolsets that each company has. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. the processes that are done in the station and the toolsets used in each process. If you leave the search key empty. • Numberuses: Number of uses of the toolset • Discarded: Indicates that it’s no longer used.2 MA ToolsetProcess In case that are needed in this tab are introduced the diferent toolset used in the selected process. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • MA Toolset ID: Toolset • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Toolset Type ID: Indicates a Toolset Type of the enterprise. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Toolsetprocess ID: Toolset Process 381/461 . In case that are needed in this tab are introduced the diferent toolset used in the selected process. C Order). The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.g. With the stations there are indicated the diferent machines that compose it. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.

382/461 Figure 45: Manufacturing: Toolset .

You cannot share data between Clients. • Usecoef: Coefficient of use that indicates the number of time that the toolset is used while the work requirement phase is processed once. • MA Toolset ID: Toolset • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • MA Toolset Type ID: Indicates a Toolset Type of the enterprise. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. 45. • Usecycle: Indicates the number of years that it’s useful 45.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.4 MA ToolsetUsed In this tab are introduced the diferent toolset used in the production run. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 383/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MA Toolset Type ID: Indicates a Toolset Type of the enterprise. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.3 MA Toolset Type The Toolset Type tab is used to detail the different types of toolsets that exist.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Used: Number of uses of the toolset in the production run. 384/461 . • MA Toolsetused ID: Indicates the toolsets used in the production run. You cannot share data between Clients.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MA Pc Case ID: Identifies each instance of a periodic control. You cannot share data between Clients. • TestResult: Description of the test results. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 46. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.46 Manufacturing: Periodic Control Periodic Control defines the diferent set of tests that can be defined to perform periodically. 385/461 .2 MA PC Value This tab registrates the planned periodic control values • MA Pc Value ID: Identifies each result of a test in a periodic control case. There are also stored the results of the tests for the different sets.1 MA Periodic Control This tab is used for periodic control definition. • MA Pc Test ID: Identifies each test done in a periodic control. 46. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Periodic Control ID: Identifies a periodic control. • Datadate: Date when the data was taken. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

386/461 Figure 46: Manufacturing: Periodic Control .

• MA Pc Case ID: Identifies each instance of a periodic control. 46. • Startdate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. You cannot share data between Clients. 387/461 . • MA Periodic Control ID: Identifies a periodic control. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.3 MA PC Test This tab contains each of the test that conforms the periodic control • MA Pc Test ID: Identifies each test done in a periodic control. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • MA Periodic Control ID: Identifies a periodic control. • Days: Delay in days from the beginning of the case to perform the test.46.4 MA PC Case This tab contains each periodic control realized. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• Launched: Indicates that the case has been launched.• Enddate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. 388/461 .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records 47. 47. String or Number. Possible options are: Yes/No.47 Manufacturing: Critical Control Points Critical Control Points are points that are measured during productions. • Critical: Indicates that the point is critical and/or mandatory • Valuetype: Set the value type expected for the point. • Valuenumber: Set the number of times that the point is measured each gathering. 389/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.2 MA CCP Group Allows the CCP grouping • MA CCP Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. • MA Ccp ID: Identifies each measured critical control point.1 MA CCP This tab contains each of the measures that will be controled. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MA CCP Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points.

390/461 Figure 47: Manufacturing: Critical Control Points .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Frecuency: Time period between measure gathering. Deprecated 47. • MA Ccp Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. You cannot share data between Clients. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Hassecproduct: Indicates that the group has a secondary product. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. • MA Ccp Shift ID: Identifies a time schedule in a shift of a critical control point group. Custom code. Available options are morning and swing shift 391/461 .3 MA CCP Shift Defines the intervals where the control points are measured for each shift. • Starttime: Start time in hours. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Endtime: End time in hours. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

Deprecated • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Hassecproduct: Indicates that the group has a secondary product. • Product: Is the product that is being measured. Custom code. Deprecated • Product: Is the product that is being measured.47. Deprecated 392/461 .4 MA Measure Group This tab contains the CCP data registered on this group • MA Measure Group ID: Indicates the groups that are measured in the measure shift. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Available options are morning and swing shift • Measuredate: Date when the measures are taken. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of.5 MA Measure Shift This tab defines the shift and date in which the gathering is done • MA Measure Shift ID: Indicates a measure shift of critical control points. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA CCP Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. Custom code. Deprecated 47. • MA Measure Shift ID: Indicates a measure shift of critical control points. Custom code. Custom code. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• MA Measure Group ID: Indicates the groups that are measured in the measure shift. 47. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Measurehour: Time when the gathering was made.7 MA Measure Values In this table gathering values are registered.6 MA Measure Time This tab defines the time of the gathering. Deprecated • Observation: Observations occurred during the process or operation. 393/461 . • MA Measure Time ID: Identifies the time of the data gathering. • Explode: Process to insert all the necessary measure values of the measured group. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.• Sellbydate: Custom code. You cannot share data between Clients. 47. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Edit: Edit measures of CCP • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • MA Measure Values ID: Identifies each value measured in a measure time.

• V Number: Result of the measure in numeric format. • V Char: Yes/No result of the measure. • V String: Result of the measure in text format. • MA Measure Time ID: Identifies the time of the data gathering. Possible options are: Yes/No. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records 394/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. String or Number.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Ccp ID: Identifies each measured critical control point. • Valuetype: Set the value type expected for the point.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.48 Manufacturing: Maintenance Maintenances can be set for machines and machine types. • Plannedtime: Estimated time for the operation. • MA Maintenance ID: Identifies a maintenance of a machine or machine type. available options are corrective. 395/461 . • Maintenance Type: Sets the maintenance type. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.1 MA Maintenance Stores maintenances that are done to the machines. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MA Maint Operation ID: Identifies a maintenance operation. • Explode: Indicates that the maintenance defined for a machine group is exploded to all its machines when is scheduled. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. corrective (urgent) and preventive. They are escheduled and in the maintenance part are stored the results of the maintenances. 48. • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type.

396/461 Figure 48: Manufacturing: Maintenance .

C Order). This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If the document is not saved. • MA Maint Operation ID: Identifies a maintenance operation.g.3 MA Maint Part In this table are stored all the maintenance parts. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the system will generate a document number for you. • MA Maint Part ID: Identifies a maintenance part. 48. 397/461 .48. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. the field is empty if you create a new document. Available options are morning and swing shift • CreateMaint: Process to insert in the part the scheduled maintenances. You cannot share data between Clients.2 MA Maint Operation Stores the maintenance operations that can be done. If you leave the field empty. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Partdate: Date of the part.

• MA Maint Part ID: Identifies a maintenance part. 48.48. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Maint Periodicity ID: Identifies a periodicity defined for a maintenance. 398/461 .4 MA Maint Periodicity Periodicities of the maintenances defined for machines and machine types. • MA Maintenance ID: Identifies a maintenance of a machine or machine type. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Maintenance ID: Identifies a maintenance of a machine or machine type. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Periodicity Type: Sets the correspondent periodicity type.5 MA Maint Scheduled Scheduled maintenances. those generated by the maintenance periodicity or manually inserted. You cannot share data between Clients. • Weekday: Day of the week • Monthday: Day of the month • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. Available options are morning and swing shift • Initdate: Initial date. • Excludeweekend: Exclude weekends from the calculation results. Here there are all the maintenances done in the application. • MA Maint Scheduled ID: Identifies a scheduled maintenance.

• Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. • Observation: Observations occurred during the process or operation. 399/461 . • Usedtime: Used time in hours. • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. • M Internal Consumption ID: Identifies an internal consumption of products. You cannot share data between Clients. Available options are morning and swing shift • Result: The Result indicates the result of any action taken on this request. corrective (urgent) and preventive. • Scheduleddate: Scheduled date. • MA Maint Worker ID: Identifies a worker that takes part on a maintenance part. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 48. • MA Maint Operation ID: Identifies a maintenance operation. available options are corrective.• MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • Maintenance Type: Sets the maintenance type.6 MA Maint Worker Workers that take part in the scheduled maintenances. • Confirmed: Indicates that the maintenance schedule has been confirmed.

• MA Maint Part ID: Identifies a maintenance part. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor. Customer. Employee or Salesperson 400/461 .

You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. machines and toolset types that forms part of it. • MA Machine Cost ID: 401/461 . Not implemented yet • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. the system automatically creates a numeric number. 49. C Order). • Usecycle: Indicates the number of years that it’s useful • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If you leave the search key empty. Work Station defines the work stations and the processes. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise.1 MA Machine In this tab is defined each machine of the enterprise. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 49.g. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.2 MA Machine Cost Machine costing information during time periods. • Purchaseyear: Indicates the purchase year. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.49 Manufacturing: Machine In machine and machine type all machines of the application are defined with the correspondent costs and maintenance schedules.

402/461 Figure 49: Manufacturing: Machine .

• Amortization: Amortization amount. • Dayhours: Working hours per day • Improductivehoursyear: Total no productive hours per year. • Cost: Cost amount. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Validfrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost • Purchaseamt: Purchase amount. • MA Machinestation ID: Machine Station 403/461 . • Consume: Not implemented yet • Costuomyear: 49. • Yearvalue: • Daysyear: Working days per year. You cannot share data between Clients.3 MA Machinestation In this table are assigned to each station the correspondent machines. • Toolsetamt: Total amount of the toolsets.

4 MA Machine Type In this table are stored the used machine types to group similar machines. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. 404/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 49. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • MA Workstation ID: Indicates a Work Station of the enterprise.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. You cannot share data between Clients.

50. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 50.g. • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.50 Manufacturing: Cost Center In cost center is defined the cost centers of the enterprise with the machines. 405/461 . If you leave the search key empty. salary categories and indirect costs. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.2 MA CostCenter In this table is configured each cost center. C Order).1 MA Costcenter IC Indirect costs associated to each cost center. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. • Cost: Cost amount. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • MA Costcenter Ic ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

406/461 Figure 50: Manufacturing: Cost Center .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. You cannot share data between Clients. When is by default the data is taken from the work requirement phase. 407/461 . when not from the work effort header. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost 50. • MA Costcenter Employee ID: Identifies a salary category of a cost center. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost Not implemented yet 50. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• Bydefault: When calculated is checked determines how is calculated the cost center use. • MA Costcenter Machine ID: Identifies a machine associated to a cost center. • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated.4 MA CostCenter Machine Machines associated to a cost center.3 MA Costcenter Employee Salary categories and employee number of each category of the cost center.

the system will generate a document number for you. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved. • Use: Indicates the use coefficient. C Order). • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost • Validfrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range 408/461 . The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. You cannot share data between Clients.• MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 MA Costcenter Version Cost center version valid during a time period. the field is empty if you create a new document. 50. If you leave the field empty. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • Cost: Cost amount.g. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.

• MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost.2 MA Indirect Cost Value Cost values of the indirect cost during a time period • MA Indirect Cost Value ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. • Cost Type: The cost type defines when the cost is added to the product.51 Manufacturing: Indirect Cost Indirect costs are costs added to the manufacturing costs. 51. production in each product and structure only to final product that is sold. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.1 MA Indirect Cost Indirect costs of a product. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) 409/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. 51. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

410/461 Figure 51: Manufacturing: Indirect Cost .

• Cost Uom: Unit of Measure for cost • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. 411/461 . • Calculate: Process to calculate the cost when the total amount is given.• Total: Total amount • Cost: Cost amount.

1 MA Incidence The Work incidence table is used to describe incidences. • Strtime: Start time in hours. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 52. • MA Incidence ID: Unique identifier for incidence • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 412/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.52 Manufacturing: Incidence The incidences are used in the work effort to store the work incidences.

413/461 Figure 52: Manufacturing: Incidence .

With the stations there are indicated the diferent machines that compose it. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. C Order). • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the processes that are done in the station and the toolsets used in each process. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. In Work stations are introduced the diferent work stations. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.53 Manufacturing: Work Station In Section are introduced the diferent sections of manufacturing that exists in the enterprise. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. • MA Cc Idprep: Not implemented yet • MA Cc Idwork: Not implemented yet • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.1 MA Process In this table are described the diferent process that are done in the work station. If you leave the search key empty. 414/461 . • MA Workstation ID: Indicates a Work Station of the enterprise. 53. the system automatically creates a numeric number. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients.g.

415/461 Figure 53: Manufacturing: Work Station .

• MA Section ID: Indicates a section of the enterprise. • MA Workstation ID: Indicates a Work Station of the enterprise. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.2 MA Section In section table it’s defined each section. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. If you leave the search key empty. 416/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MA Section ID: Indicates a section of the enterprise. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 53. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. C Order).g.3 MA Workstation In this table it’s defined the work station. It’s indicated to which section belongs and the GFHs of preparations and work. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.53. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

1 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees. 54.54 Salary Category Salary categories are the different cost ranges of the employees. 417/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • C Salary Category Cost ID: Identifies a cost of a salary category during a time period. 54. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 54. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category 54. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.4 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.5 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees.2 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. 54.3 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees.

418/461 Figure 54: Salary Category .

• Cost: Cost amount.9 54.6 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories.10 C Salary Category C Salary Category Cost Salary categories for employees.7 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. 54.8 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost 419/461 .54. Costs of a salary categories. 54. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category 54.

55.1 MRP SalesForecast In this table are stored the expected sales. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.55 MRP Manufacturing planification plans the work requirements necessaries for the expected material requirements. Planning method defines the different data that is taking into account in the planifications. • MRP Salesforecastline ID: Identifies an expected sale line. This can include Vendor. You cannot share data between Clients. • Datedoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. • MRP Salesforecast ID: Identifier of an expected sales header. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. Employee or Salesperson • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MRP Salesforecast ID: Identifier of an expected sales header. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.2 MRP SalesForecastLine In this table are stored the expected sale lines. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Purchase planifications plans the necessaries purchase orders. 420/461 . Sales forecast are the expected sales for a time period. You cannot share data between Clients. 55. Customer.

421/461 Figure 55: MRP .

422/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Isproduction: Sets the record id for production. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.4 MRP PlanningMethod The planning method sets the inputs that are taken into account for the planning processes.3 MRP Planner Planner of the MRP • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. • Dateplanned: Expected date of the transaction. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 55. 55. • Ispurchase: Sets the record id for purchase. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • MRP Planningmethod ID: Identifies a method for filtering the input for planning processes.

• MRP Planningmethod ID: Identifies a method for filtering the input for planning processes. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Inouttrxtype: Transaction types available for the MRP. • Daysfrom: Number of days from the main date to the begining of the period.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MRP Planningmethodline ID: Identifies a filter option for the input types of the planning methods. You cannot share data between Clients. 55.6 MRP Run Production Headers of the production planning processes. • Daysto: Number of days from the main date to the end of the period. • Weighting: Percentage of the transaction that is used.5 MRP PlanningMethodLine The planning method line sets the filter options for the input types of the planning methods. in so much per one. • MRP Run Production ID: Headers of the production planning processes. 423/461 . • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. 55. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. Customer. This can include Vendor. • Datedoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. 424/461 .• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Securitymargin: Margin in days between the different transactions. Product categories are used for pricing. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Simulate: Process to run the production planning process. • Launchwr: Process to generate work requirements. • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Recalculatestock: Process to recalculate the product quantities of the lines. • Launchmr: Process to generate material requirements. Employee or Salesperson • Timehorizon: Time horizon in number of days for the planning process. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

425/461 . • MRP Run Production ID: Headers of the production planning processes. • Isfixed: Is fixed • C Orderline ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. • Neededqty: Quantity needed • Planneddate: Planned date of the transaction. • MRP Salesforecastline ID: Identifies an expected sale line. • M Requisitionline ID: Identifies each product required to purchase in a requisition • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • MRP Run Productionline ID: Identifies a line of the production planning processes.7 MRP Run ProductionLine Lines of the production planning processes.55. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • Inouttrxtype: Transaction types available for the MRP. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• Datedoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 55.• Isexploded: The line has been exploded. • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP.8 MRP Run Purchase Headers of the purchase planning processes. Product categories are used for pricing. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Cumqty: Cumulate quantity. • Isplanned: Is planned. 426/461 . • Vendor ID: Identifies a business partner that is a vendor. • Plannedorderdate: Planned date to order the transaction. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Recalculatestock: Process to recalculate the product quantities of the lines. You cannot share data between Clients. • MRP Run Purchase ID: Identifies a header of the purchase planning processes.

Employee or Salesperson • Timehorizon: Time horizon in number of days for the planning process. 427/461 . • Simulate: Process to run the production planning process. • Launchpo: Process to generate purchase orders. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • MRP Run Purchase ID: Identifies a header of the purchase planning processes. 55.9 MRP Run PurchaseLine Lines of the purchase planning processes. • Securitymargin: Margin in days between the different transactions. • MRP Run Purchaseline ID: Identifies a line of the purchase planning processes. • Recalculatestock: Process to recalculate the product quantities of the lines.• C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • Neededqty: Quantity needed • Planneddate: Planned date of the transaction. Customer. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This can include Vendor. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

• Inouttrxtype: Transaction types available for the MRP. • MRP Salesforecastline ID: Identifies an expected sale line. • M Requisitionline ID: Identifies each product required to purchase in a requisition • Iscompleted: Line completed • Plannedorderdate: Planned date to order the transaction. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. • Isfixed: Is fixed • C Orderline ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. Employee or Salesperson • Cumqty: Cumulate quantity. Customer. This can include Vendor. 428/461 . • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

56. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. This includes customers. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Sizemultiplier: 56. vendors and employees. You cannot share data between Clients. 429/461 . These schedules are used to invoice rented locators • M WH Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.2 M WH Schedule Contains all the differents schedules for a warehouse.56 Warehouse services Business Partner allows you do define any party with whom you transact.1 M Locator Type Contains all the differents types for a locator • M Locator Type ID: The ID identifies the unique type for the locator • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Warehouse and Locators defines each Warehouse. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

430/461 Figure 56: Warehouse services .

You cannot share data between Clients. • Invoicingtype: How to invoice a locator is being renting 56.4 M WH Period Contains all the periods for the schedule • M WH Period ID: The ID identifies a unique period for the warehouse schedule • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range.3 M WH Schedule Product Contains all the differents product that will be used in the invoices • M WH Schedule Product ID: The ID idenitfies a unique product for the warehouse shedule • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M WH Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. • M WH Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. (E.• Periodicity: Regular intervals. 431/461 .g: every two weeks. monthly) • Generateperiods: A button that generates periods depending on two dates • Activateperiods: 56.

This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.5 M WH Period Invoiced Contains all the invoices generated due based on the rented locators for that period • M WH Period Invoiced ID: The ID identifies a unique period invoiced for the the period • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range.6 M InOutLine Type Contains all the periods for a warehouse • M Inoutline Type ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. • Invoicingmode: Invoicing Mode 432/461 . • M WH Period ID: The ID identifies a unique period for the warehouse schedule • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 56. Customer. Employee or Salesperson • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 56.

• IN Product ID: Identifies a service due to material receipts • OUT Product ID: Identifies a service due to shipments out 433/461 .

Maintain your Resources. • C Doctype ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules 434/461 . The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. C Order).g. Product defines all products used by an organization.57 External POS External Point of Sales defines the different used POS and the products that can sale. The product for the resource is automatically created and synchronized. 57. The Product Category allows you to define different groups of products. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided.1 C ExternalPOS External Point of Sales • C Externalpos ID: External Point of Sales • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the system automatically creates a numeric number. in the Resource and don’t change it in the product. Update Name. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. etc. These products include those sold to customers. Unit of Measure. If you leave the search key empty. These groups can be used in generating Price Lists. used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. defining margins and for easily assigning different accounting parameters for products.

435/461 Figure 57: External POS .

436/461 . • Salesrep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. Customer. Employee or Salesperson • M Pricelist ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing.2 C ExternalPOS Category Product Categories • C Externalpos Category ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Include Product Category: If it is checked the selected categories will be included else they will be excluded. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. This can include Vendor. You cannot share data between Clients. 57. • C Externalpos ID: External Point of Sales • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. Product categories are used for pricing. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. • Include Product: If it is checked the selected products will be included else they will be excluded.• C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. C Order). • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. If you leave the search key empty. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. You cannot share data between Clients. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The Location is the default location when receiving the stored products.57. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients.3 C ExternalPOS Product Products • C Externalpos Product ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Externalpos ID: External Point of Sales • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. comment or help about the use of this item.4 M Product Defines each product and identifies it for use in price lists and orders. the system automatically creates a numeric number. 57. 437/461 .

UPC (A). ITF-14. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. UPC (E). MSI/Plessey. Code 39. JAN-8. • IsInvoicePrintDetails: The Print Details on Invoice indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Invoice as opposed to this product. • IsVerified: The Verified check box indicates if the configuration of this product has been verified. • IsPurchased: The Purchased check box indicates if this product is purchased by this organization. ISBN. Code 93. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. EAN-8. ISSN. • IsSold: The Sold check box indicates if this product is sold by this organization. • IsPickListPrintDetails: The Print Details on Pick List indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Pick List as opposed to this product. and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. ITF. • IsBOM: The Bill of Materials check box indicates if this product consists of a bill of materials. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. This is used for products that consist of a bill of materials 438/461 . • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. EAN-13. Code 25.• UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. JAN-13. Code 128. • IsStocked: The Stocked check box indicates if this product is stocked by this Organization. POSTNET and FIM.

• C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product 439/461 .• C RevenueRecognition ID: The Revenue Recognition indicates how revenue will be recognized for this product • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • Classification: The Classification can be used to optionally group products. For example. Product categories are used for pricing. • S Resource ID: The ID identifies a unique resource Not implemented yet • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • Volume: The Volume indicates the volume of the product in the Volume UOM of the Client • Weight: The Weight indicates the weight of the product in the Weight UOM of the Client • ShelfWidth: The Shelf Width indicates the width dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfHeight: The Shelf Height indicates the height dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfDepth: The Shelf Depth indicates the depth dimension required on a shelf for a product • UnitsPerPallet: The Units per Pallet indicates the number of units of this product which fit on a pallet.

This can include Vendor. The image can be a gif.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. otherwise the guarantee date is calculated by adding the days to the delivery date. • ImageURL: URL of image. • R MailText ID: The Mail Template indicates the mail template for return messages. there is no limit to the availability or guarantee. • DescriptionURL: URL for the description • GuaranteeDays: If the value is 0. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • DownloadURL: Semicolon separated list of URLs to be downloaded or distributed • M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. jpeg or png. • VersionNo: Version Number Not implemented yet • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. but retrieved at runtime. • S ExpenseType ID: Expense report type • ProductType: The type of product also determines accounting consequences. Customer. Employee or Salesperson 440/461 . The image is not stored in the database.

Deprecated • Greenpoint Uom: Custom code. • MA Producttype ID: • Production: A product that is used for production plans 441/461 . Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated.• Ispriceprinted: It allows you to print or not the price of a product in a document so you can summary many products in just one. Deprecated • Upc2: Custom code. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. • Name2: Additional Name • Costtype: Different types of cost • Coststd: The value of the standard cost • Stock Min: Minimum stock of a product Not implemented yet • Enforce Attribute: For differing the stock of a product by the attribute Not implemented yet • Bundle Uom: Custom code.

1 AD ImpFormat The Import Format tab contains each record parameter configuration for each data import type. XML. Selecting the ’Process’ button will either add or modify the appropriate records. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD ImpFormat ID: The ID identifies a unique import format • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. The Import Loader Format is used for defining the file layout for product information which will be imported. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Selecting the ’Process’ button will either add or modify the appropriate records. The Import Products is an interim table which is used when importing external data into the system.58 Import data Allows the bank statement import configuration and its execution The Import Business Partner is an interim table which is used when importing external data into the system. 442/461 . • FormatType: The Format is a drop down list box for selecting the format type (text. The Import Natural Account is an interim table which is used when importing external data into the system. Selecting the ’Process’ button will either add or modify the appropriate records. 58. tab delimited. etc) of the file to be imported • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

443/461 Figure 58: Import data .

then Function Name 444/461 . you need to enclose it like ’this’) • AD ImpFormat Row ID: The ID identifies a unique format field • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. . It must be in Java Notation • DecimalPoint: Decimal Point in the data file • DivideBy100: Divide number by 100 to get correct amount • ConstantValue: Constant value • Callout: Function Calls separated by semicolons. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table • StartNo: The Start Number indicates the starting position in the line or field number in the line • EndNo: • DataType: • DataFormat: The Date Format indicates how dates are defined on the record to be imported. 3rd: Underscore.58.2 AD ImpFormat Row Define the individual field based on the table definition.1st: System/User. • AD ImpFormat ID: The ID identifies a unique import format • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.e. if it is a ’string’. Please note that you have to make sure that a Constant has the correct SQL data type (i. 2nd: Enter/Leave. SE /SL /UE /UL .

C Order). Customer. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Employee or Salesperson • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. This can include Vendor.For details see www. • GroupValue: The value of the business partner group.g. You cannot share data between Clients. it won’t work 445/461 .3 I BPartner The import business partner is an interin table which is used when importing external data into the system • I BPartner ID: The ID identifies a unique business partner to import • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.dnb. If you leave the search key empty. • DUNS: Used for EDI . • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. If before inserting it doesn’t exists in the table C BP Group. • NAICS: The NAICS/SIC identifies either of these codes that may be applicable to this Business Partner.• Script: Use Java language constructs to define the result of the calculation 58. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Name2: Additional Name • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. This value is the short name for the group.com/dunsno/list.htm • TaxID: The Tax ID field identifies the legal Identification number of this Entity.

• CountryCode: For details . apartment number or similar information. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country.• C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • Address1: The Address 1 identifies the address for an entity’s location • Address2: The Address 2 provides additional address information for an entity. It can be used for building location.htm • Title: The Title indicates the name that an entity is referred to as. if appropriate. • Postal: The Postal Code field identifies the postal code for this entity’s address. • Postal Add: The Additional ZIP or Postal Code identifies.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1.http://www. • City: The City identifies a unique City for this Country or Region.http://www. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. any additional Postal Code information.html or .org/trade/rec/rec03en.unece. 446/461 .din. • ContactName: Business Partner Contact Name • ContactDescription: Description of Contact • Comments: The Comments field allows for free form entry of additional information.

com). Openbravo checks the Unit of Measure (default if not set). This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. the Business Partner. joe. • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location • Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. the Currency (defaults to accounting currency if not set).smith@company. • Birthday: Birthday or Anniversary day • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. the Product Type (only Items and Services).g. the Product Category (default if not set).4 I Product Before importing. • BPContactGreeting: Greeting for Business Partner Contact • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. 58. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. Passwords are required to identify authorized users. the uniquen 447/461 . • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.• Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed.

ITF-14. EAN-13. UPC (A). the system automatically creates a numeric number. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. Code 93. JAN-13. • X12DE355: The Unit of Measure Code indicates the EDI X12 Code Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 448/461 . • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If you leave the search key empty. POSTNET and FIM. ITF. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. Code 25. Code 128. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. UPC (E). • Help: The Help field contains a hint.• I Product ID: The ID identifies a unique product • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. ISBN. Code 39. MSI/Plessey.g. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. EAN-8. C Order). JAN-8. ISSN. comment or help about the use of this item. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

but retrieved at runtime. The image can be a gif. The image is not stored in the database. it won’t work • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.• ProductCategory Value: The value of the product category. • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product • ImageURL: URL of image. • ProductType: The type of product also determines accounting consequences. • Classification: The Classification can be used to optionally group products. • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. • Volume: The Volume indicates the volume of the product in the Volume UOM of the Client • Weight: The Weight indicates the weight of the product in the Weight UOM of the Client • ShelfWidth: The Shelf Width indicates the width dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfHeight: The Shelf Height indicates the height dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfDepth: The Shelf Depth indicates the depth dimension required on a shelf for a product • UnitsPerPallet: The Units per Pallet indicates the number of units of this product which fit on a pallet. If before inserting it doesn’t exists in the table M Product Category Id. 449/461 . Product categories are used for pricing. This value is the short name for the group. jpeg or png.

This can include Vendor. • RoyaltyAmt: • PriceEffective: The Price Effective indicates the date this price is for. Customer.unece. • PricePO: The PO Price indicates the price for a product per the purchase order.org/trade/rec/rec09en. • VendorCategory: The Vendor Category identifies the category used by the vendor for this product.htm • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. This allows you to enter future prices for products which will become effective when appropriate. This value goes rigth to the field Search key on the window Business partner • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Employee or Salesperson • ISO Code: For details . • VendorProductNo: The Vendor Product Number identifies the number used by the vendor for this product. 450/461 .• DescriptionURL: URL for the description • BPartner Value: The value or short name for the business partner. • Manufacturer: Manufacturer • Order Min: The Minimum Order Quantity indicates the smallest quantity of this product which can be ordered.http://www. • Order Pack: The Order Pack Quantity indicates the number of units in each pack of this product.

• DeliveryTime Promised: The Promised Delivery Time indicates the number of days between the order date and the date that delivery was promised. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.5 I ElementValue This process imports the accounting accounts tree into the organization • I ElementValue ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. C Order).• CostPerOrder: The Cost Per Order indicates the fixed charge levied when an order for this product is placed. 451/461 . • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. 58. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.g. If you leave the search key empty. • ElementName: • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values.

• PostBudget: The Post Budget indicates if budget values can be posted to this element value. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.Liability. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • PostStatistical: • PostEncumbrance: • Default Account: • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table 452/461 .Memo. E . O. L .Expense. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. R -Revenue and M. if any are applicable. • ParentValue: • ParentElementValue ID: • PostActual: The Post Actual indicates if actual values can be posted to this element value. Note: Memo account amounts are ignored when checking for balancing • AccountSign: Indicates if the expected balance for this account should be a Debit or a Credit.Asset. • IsDocControlled: • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node.Owner Equity. • AccountType: Valid account types are A . The account type is used to determine what taxes. validating payables and receivables for business partners.

Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.6 I Order You should supply the Document Type Name (or ID). • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. with centralized services. You cannot share data between Clients.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. and inter-organization transactions. 453/461 . • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. The best way is to set the Document Type Name as a Constant in your Import File Format or as an imported fi • I Order ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 58. • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. The Document Type is on purpose not fully derived as it has too many consequences if it’s wrong. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.

454/461 . • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • BillTo ID: The Bill/Invoice To indicates the address to use when remitting bills • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • Postal: The Postal Code field identifies the postal code for this entity’s address. This can include Vendor. Customer. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. It can be used for building location.• M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • Address1: The Address 1 identifies the address for an entity’s location • Address2: The Address 2 provides additional address information for an entity. apartment number or similar information. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Employee or Salesperson • BPartnerValue: • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization.

This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • ContactName: Business Partner Contact Name • Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. 455/461 . • CountryCode: For details .de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country.unece.http://www.html or . joe. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document.• City: The City identifies a unique City for this Country or Region.din.htm • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.g. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document.http://www.com).org/trade/rec/rec03en. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • DocTypeName: • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.smith@company.

• PaymentTermValue: Key of the Payment Term • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. ITF. ISBN. • TaxIndicator: The Tax Indicator identifies the short name that will print on documents referencing this tax.g. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. Code 128. EAN-8. If the document is not saved. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). C Order). POSTNET and FIM. MSI/Plessey. • ProductValue: • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. 456/461 . the field is empty if you create a new document. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. UPC (E). If you leave the field empty. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. Code 93. EAN-13. ITF-14. Code 39. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. UPC (A). Code 25. JAN-13. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. ISSN. JAN-8. the system will generate a document number for you. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

if any.• LineDescription: • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • QtyOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered. • Datepromised: The Date Promised indicates the date. • Billto Upc: • Bpartnerupc: • C Bpartner Location Upc: • Dateordered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency. • Order Referenceno: • Vendor Upc: 457/461 . • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. that an Order was promised for. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Validcombinationident: The identifier for the account combination. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.58. This can include Vendor. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier 458/461 .7 I Budgetline Is an interin table which is used when external data into the system • I Budgetline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Productident: The identifier for the Product. • C Budgetline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • C Validcombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. Customer. Employee or Salesperson • Partnerident: The identifier for the Partner. • Periodident: The identifier for the Period. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar.

This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Salesregion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. • Salesregionident: The identifier for the Sales region. • Campaignident: The identifier for the Campaign. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • Activityident: • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. and inter-organization transactions. • Orgtrxident: The identifier for the Organization. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • Projectident: The identifier for the Project.• AD Orgtrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. 459/461 . with centralized services. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program.

Product categories are used for pricing. • I Errormsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Currencyident: The identifier for the Currency. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier 460/461 .• Bpgroupident: The identifier for the business partner group. • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. • Prodcategoryident: The identifier for the product category. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Budget ID: Used to define the anticipated costs of doing business • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • I Isimported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed.

c Openbravo S. To view a copy of this license. USA. visit http://creativecommons. any redistribution of this work or any derivative work must maintain this copyright notice and.com/docs/ 461/461 . 559 Nathan Abbott Way. Stanford.5 Spain License. 2007 This work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2.openbravo.5/ es/ or send a letter to Creative Commons. the Openbravo logo.org/licenses/by-sa/2. California 94305.L. As attribution to the original author. The most updated copy of this work may be obtained at http://www. visibly on all its pages.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful